department of public works west operations …kent schexnaydre district 2 councilman ... 017823...

PROJECT MANUAL

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

WEST OPERATIONS BUILDING

THIBAUT DRIVE DONALDSONVILLE, LA 70346

Project No.: ENG-11-043

Tommy Martinez Parish President

Kenneth Dawson

Chief Administrative Officer

Kim Braud Chief Executive Assistant

Parish Council:

Oliver Joseph District 1 Councilman Kent Schexnaydre District 2 Councilman Travis Turner District 3 Councilman Daniel "Doc" Satterlee District 4 Councilman Dempsey Lambert District 5 Councilman Randy Clouatre District 6 Councilman Chris Loar - Chair District 7 Councilman Teri Casso District 8 Councilwoman Todd Lambert District 9 Councilman Bryan Melancon District 10 Councilman Benny Johnson District 11 Councilman

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OCTOBER 2014

Table of Contents 000001-1

Ascension Parish Department of Public Works West Operations Building DONALDSONVILLE, LOUISIANA

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGES PTP Project Title Page 1 TOC Table of Contents 1 - 5 Procurement Requirements ADV Advertisements for Bids 1 - 2 Instructions for Procurement IB Instructions To Bidders 1 - 7 Procurement Forms and Supplements B Bid Form 1 BB Bid Bond 1 - 2 AC Attestations 1 - 2 Contracting Requirements C Contract Between Owner & Contractor 1 – 20 PFB Performance Bond 1 - 4 PYB Payment Bond 1 – 4 AF Affidavit 1 ID I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution 1 - 3 TE Tax Exempt Certificate 1 NA Notice of Award 1 NP Notice to Proceed 1 Project Forms V Schedule of Values 1 - 5 CO Change Order 1 CSC Certificate of Substantial Completion 1 RA Recommendation of Acceptance 1 PO Partial Occupancy 1 Conditions of the Contract GC General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 1 - 38 SC Supplementary Conditions 1 - 23 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION TITLE ISSUED REVISED

Table of Contents 000001-2 J & J Engineers, Inc. Consulting Engineers

011000 Summary of Work 2 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 2 012900 Payment Procedures 3 013100 Project Management And Coordination 5 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 4 013300 Submittal Procedures 6 014000 Quality Requirements 5 014200 References 4

015000 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 8 015050 Mobilization 1 016000 Product Requirements 4 017300 Execution 5 017700 Closeout Procedures 4 017823 Operation And Maintenance Data 5

021000 Site Preparation 3 022000 Earthwork 9 022100 Grading 1 031000 Concrete Formwork 3 032000 Concrete Reinforcement 3 033000 Cast in Place Concrete 7 042000 Unit Masonry Assemblies 8 052100 Steel Joists 3 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 7 055000 Metal Fabrications 3 055100 Metal Stairs 5 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 4 066400 Plastic Paneling 2 072100 Building Insulation 4 072714 Self Adhered Sheet Membrane Air Barriers, Vapor Permeable 9 079200 Joint Sealants 6 081416 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 7 081416 Flush Wood Doors 4 083323 Overhead Coiling Doors 5 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances And Storefronts 7 088000 Glazing 8 092216 Non Structural Metal Framing 4 092900 Gypsum Board 6 096519 Resilient Tile Ceiling 4 096513 Resilient Base And Accessories 3 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 3 096816 Sheet Carpeting 3 099113 Exterior Paints And Coatings 7 099123 Interior Paints And Coatings 7 101400 Signage 3

102113 Toilet Compartments 3 102800 Toilet, Bath And Laundry Accessories 3 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 3 104416 Fire Extinguishers 2

133419 Metal Building Systems 16 150000 Air Conditioning and heating 3

SECTION TITLE ISSUED REVISED

Table of Contents 000001-3 J & J Engineers, Inc. Consulting Engineers

151000 Plumbing System 7 160001 General Specifications For Electrical Installation 5 160002 Raceway, Fittings and Boxes 5 160004 Wires and Cables (Power & Control) 4 160007 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment 4 160008 Lighting Fixtures and Accessories 2 160009 Industrial Gaseous Generator Set 6

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Parish of Ascension www.ascensionparish.net

TOMMY MARTINEZ ASCENSION PARISH PRESIDENT

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received by Ascension Parish Government Purchasing Department, 120 East Railroad Street, Gonzales, Louisiana 70737 (P.O. Box 2392, Gonzales, Louisiana 70707) on Tuesday, November 4, 2014, 2:00 P.M. local time from Commercial Building Contractors, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud for construction of the project described as follows:

Department of Public Works West Operations Building

• General Scope of Project: New construction of the DPW West Operations Building including an 8,155 square foot office/shop building, approximately 20,700 square foot fenced, gravel lay-down area, hard surface parking, access roadway, back-up generator, landscaping, and site drainage improvements.

All bids must be in accordance with the Bid Documents and any bid received after 2:00 p.m. on the day and date of the bid opening will be returned unopened. Properly Licensed Louisiana Contractors may obtain copies of the BID DOCUMENTS up to 24 hours prior to bid time. Complete Bid Documents, prepared by J&J Engineers and Quality Engineering & Surveying, LLC, dated October 6, 2014, for this project are available in paper format and may be obtained from the engineer, Jatinder Goel, 5932 Kellywood Oaks Dr., Baton Rouge, LA 70817 (225-612-3938) upon payment of One Hundred Twenty-Five Dollars ($125.00) per set. Bid documents may be reviewed for free at the Parish Purchasing Office, address above. According to Act No. 478, July 9, 1988, Section 1, R.S. 38:22:12: Deposits on the first set of documents furnished to bona fide prime bidders will be fully refunded upon return of the documents no later than ten (10) Days after receipt of bids. On other sets of documents furnished to bidders, the deposits less actual cost of reproduction will be refunded upon return of the documents no later than ten (10) day after receipt of bids. No refund will be given to contractor that has been awarded the project. No refund will be made to non-bidders or sub-bidders. ALL PLANS MUST BE RETURNED IN GOOD CONDITION, COMPLETE WITH ADDENDA, IN GOOD CONDITION TO QUALIFY FOR REFUND. Questions about this procedure shall be directed to the Engineer at: Jatinder Goel 5932 Kellywood Oaks Dr. Baton Rouge, LA 70817 Telephone: 225-621-3938 Bids from only the respective contractors obtaining plans, must be submitted on proposal forms provided in the bid documents. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his/her address, contractors state license number and the name of the project for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail or hand delivery the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to the following: VIA U.S. Mail Ascension Parish Government Purchasing Department

Sealed Bid: Department of Public Works West Operations Building P.O. Box 2392 Gonzales, LA 70707

Hand Delivery 120 East Railroad Gonzales, LA 70737 Department of Public Works West Operations Building Contractor Name:_________________________________________ LA State Contractor License Number:__________________________

RS 38:2218. Evidence of good faith; countersigning To address the above requirement for electronic bids Ascension Parish Government will allow electronic bids submitted via the parish approved on-line bid site to be submitted as follows:

A. A copy of the bid bond, certified check, or cashier's check, must be attached to bid document submitted electronically

B. The original bid bond document, certified check, or cashier's check, must be received in our office no later than 48 hours after bid opening date and time (Ascension Parish Purchasing Department, P.O. Box 2392, Gonzales, Louisiana 70707 – Physical; 120 East Railroad Street, Gonzales, Louisiana 70737) C. The bid-bond, certified check, or cashier's check, envelope must be clearly labeled as a “Bid Bond” with the project name, vendor’s name as it appears on the bid documents and address.

Beginning at 2:00 p.m., November 4, 2014 all bids will be downloaded. No bids are accepted after 2:00 p.m. All addenda, Amendments, Letters of Clarification, and Withdrawal Notices will be posted online. Construction proposal information may be

accessed via the internet at www.centralauctionhouse.com Users must click on Login and create a new user registration to view and download plans and specifications. Once logged in, users must click on Ascension Parish Government to view current

advertisement listings. This listing is titled “Department of Public Works West Operations Building”. Registered users will have access to view Project Information, submit a question concerning the project, and view the plans. All project specific notices are found here. It will be the responsibility of the bidder to check for updates. All submitted questions will be forwarded by email to

the Project Manager and the Project Engineer for a response. Ascension Parish shall not be responsible if the bidder cannot complete and submit a bid due to failure or incomplete delivery of the files submitted via the internet

Bid security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Total Bid must accompany each Bid, and shall be made payable to the Owner. A mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will be held on Wednesday, October 22, 2014 at 2:00 PM at the DPW East Conference Room: 42077 Churchpoint Rd. Gonzales, Louisiana 70737. Contractors should have obtained a set of plans and specifications prior to this time. Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis stated in the Instructions to Bidders. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 45 days after bid opening except as provided by law. Bidders must meet the requirements of the State of Louisiana Contractor’s Licensing Law, R.S. 37:2151 et seq. Bidders must comply with provisions of R.S. 38:2212.10. The designers’ construction cost estimate and Parish budget will be read aloud upon opening of the bids. The Parish of Ascension reserves the right to disqualify any Bid , response to a Request for Qualifications, or Request for Proposals if it is determined that the submitting business entity is not in good standing with the Louisiana Secretary of State or is not authorized to do business in the State of Louisiana. Ascension Parish Government reserves the right to reject any and all bids for just cause. Ascension Parish Government Tommy Martinez, Parish President CHIEF - Please publish 10/09/14, 10/16/14, 10/23/14 ADVOCATE - Please publish 10/091/14, 10/16/14, 10/23/14 WEEKLY- Please publish 10/09/14, 10/16/14, 10/23/14

2013 IB -1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS COMPLETION TIME: The Bidder shall agree to fully complete the contract within (three hundred) 300 consecutive calendar days, subject to such extensions as may be granted under Paragraph 8.3, in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, and acknowledges that this construction time will start on or before the date specified in the written “Notice to Proceed” from the Owner. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The Bidder shall agree to pay as Liquidated Damages the amount of Two Hundred Dollars (200.00) for each consecutive calendar day for which the work is not complete, beginning with the first day beyond the contract completion date stated on the “Notice to Proceed” or as amended by change order.

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 The Bid Documents include the following:

Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Bid Bond General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201, 2007 Edition Supplementary Conditions Contract Between Owner and Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond Affidavit Change Order Form Partial Occupancy Form Recommendation of Acceptance Other Documents (if applicable) Specifications & Drawings Addenda issued during the bid period and acknowledged in the Bid Form

1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201 and the Supplementary Conditions are applicable to the Bid Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written and/or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the opening of bids which modify or interpret the Bid Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, corrections and prior approvals.

1.4 A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein supported by data called for by the Bid Documents. 1.5 Base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described as the base, to which work may be added, or deleted for sums stated in alternate bids. 1.6 An alternate bid (or alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bid Documents is accepted. 1.7 A Bidder is one who submits a bid for a prime Contract with the Owner for the work described in the Bid Documents. 1.8 A Sub-bidder is one who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials and/or labor for a portion of the work. 1.9 Where the word "Architect" is used in any of the documents, it shall refer to the Prime Designer of the project, regardless of discipline.

ARTICLE 2 PRE-BID CONFERENCE 2.1 The purpose of the Pre-Bid Conference is to familiarize Bidders with the requirements of the Project and the intent of the Bid Documents, and to receive comments and information from interested Bidders. If the Pre-Bid Conference is stated in the

2013 IB -2

Advertisement for Bids to be a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, bids shall be accepted only from those bidders who attend the Pre-Bid Conference. Contractors who are not in attendance for the entire Pre-Bid Conference will be considered to have not attended. 2.2 Any revision of the Bid Documents made as a result of the Pre-Bid Conference shall not be valid unless included in an addendum. ARTICLE 3 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 3.1 Each Bidder by making his bid represents that: 3.1.1 He has read and understands the Bid Documents and his bid is made in accordance therewith. 3.1.2 He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed. 3.1.3 His bid is based solely upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the Bid Documents as advertised and as modified by addenda. 3.1.4 His bid is not based on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bid Documents and addenda. 3.1.5 He is familiar with Code of Governmental Ethics requirement that prohibits public servants and/or their immediate family members from bidding on or entering into contracts; he is aware that the Designer and its principal owners are considered Public Servants under the Code of Governmental Ethics for the limited purposes and scope of the Design Contract with the Parish on this Project (see Ethics Board Advisory Opinion, No. 2009-378 and 2010-128); and neither he nor any principal of the Bidder with a controlling interest therein has an immediate family relationship with the Designer or any principal within the Designer’s firm. (see La. R.S. 42:1113). Any Bidder submitting a bid in violation of this clause shall be disqualified and any contract entered into in violation of this clause shall be null and void.

3.2 The Bidder must be fully qualified under any State or local licensing law for Contractors in effect at the time and at the location of the work before submitting his bid. In the State of Louisiana, Revised Statutes 37:2150, et seq. will be considered, if applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining that all of his Sub-bidders or prospective Subcontractors are duly licensed in accordance with law. ARTICLE 4 BID DOCUMENTS 4.1 Copies 4.1.1 Bid Documents may be obtained from the Architect for a deposit as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. The deposit will be refunded as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. No deposits will be refunded on Bid Documents returned later than ten days after receipt of bids. 4.1.1.2 As an alternative method of distribution, the Bid Documents may be provided in electronic format. They may be obtained as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. 4.1.1.2.1 If electronic distribution is available, paper copies will not be provided. 4.1.2 Complete sets of Bid Documents shall be used in preparing bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents. 4.1.3 The Owner or Architect in making copies of the Bid Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 4.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bid Documents 4.2.1 Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bid Documents or of the site and local conditions. 4.2.2 Bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bid Documents shall make a

2013 IB -3

written request to the Architect, to reach him at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 4.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bid Documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bid Documents made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. 4.3 Substitutions 4.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bid Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. No substitutions shall be allowed after bids are received. 4.3.2 No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been submitted by the Proposer and has been received by the Architect at least seven (7) working days prior to the opening of bids. (RS38:2295C) Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. It shall be the responsibility of the proposer to include in his proposal all changes required of the Bid Documents if the proposed product is used. Prior approval is given contingent upon supplier being responsible for any costs which may be necessary to modify the space or facilities needed to accommodate the materials and equipment approved. 4.3.3 If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 4.4 Addenda 4.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bid Documents.

4.4.2 Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bid Documents are on file for that purpose. 4.4.3 Except as described herein, addenda shall not be issued within a period of seventy-two (72) hours prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and any other legal holidays. If the necessity arises of issuing an addendum modifying plans and specifications within the seventy-two (72) hour period prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, then the opening of bids shall be extended at least seven but no more than twenty-one (21) working days, without the requirement of re-advertising. Facility Planning shall be consulted prior to issuance of such an addendum and shall approve such issuance. The revised time and date for the opening of bids shall be stated in the addendum. 4.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain from the Architect prior to submitting his bid that he has received all addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt on the Bid Form. 4.4.5 The Owner shall have the right to extend the bid date by up to (30) thirty days without the requirement of re-advertising. Any such extension shall be made by addendum issued by the Architect. ARTICLE 5 BID PROCEDURE 5.1 Form and Style of Bids 5.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form provided in the Project Manual. 5.1.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in manually in ink or typewritten. 5.1.3 Bid sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the written words shall govern. 5.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the bid or his authorized representative.

2013 IB -4

5.1.5 Bidders are cautioned to complete all alternates should such be required in the Bid Form. Failure to submit alternate prices will render the bid non responsive and shall cause its rejection. 5.1.6 Bidders are cautioned to complete all unit prices should such be required in the Bid Form. Unit prices represent a price proposal to do a specified quantity and quality of work. Unit prices are incorporated into the base bid but are not the sole components thereof. 5.1.7 Bidders are strongly cautioned to ensure that all blanks on the bid form are completely and accurately filled in. 5.1.8 Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the Bid Form nor qualify his bid in any other manner. 5.1.9 The bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a Contract. The authority of the signature of the person submitting the bid shall be deemed sufficient and acceptable under any of the following conditions: (a) Signature on bid is that of any corporate officer or member of a partnership or partnership in commendam listed on most current annual report on file with Secretary of State. (b) Signature on bid is that of authorized representative of corporation, partnership, or other legal entity and bid is accompanied by corporate resolution, certification as to the corporate principal, or other documents indicating authority. (c) Corporation, partnership, or other legal entity has filed in the records of the Secretary of State, an affidavit, resolution or other acknowledged or authentic document indicating the names of all parties authorized to submit bids for public contracts. A bid submitted by an agency shall have a current Power of Attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind Bidder. The name and license number on the envelope shall be the same as the entity identified on the Bid Form. 5.1.10 On any bid in excess of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00), the Contractor shall certify that he is licensed under R.S. 37: 2150-2173 and show his license number on the bid above his signature or his duly authorized representative.

5.2 Bid Security 5.2.1 No bid shall be considered or accepted unless the bid is accompanied by bid security in an amount of five percent (5.0%) of the base bid and all alternates. The bid security shall be in the form of a certified check or cashier's check drawn on a bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or a Bid Bond written by a surety company licensed to do business in Louisiana and signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. The Bid Bond shall be written on the Bid Bond Form, and the surety for the bond must meet the qualifications stated thereon. The Bid Bond shall include the legal name of the bidder be in favor of the Parish of Ascension, and shall be accompanied by appropriate power of attorney. The Bid Bond must be signed by both the bidder/principal and the surety in the space provided on the Bid Bond Form. Failure by the bidder/principal or the surety to sign the bid bond shall result in the rejection of the bid. Bid security furnished by the Contractor shall guarantee that the Contractor will, if awarded the work according to the terms of his proposal, enter into the Contract and furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by these Bid Documents, within ten (10) days after written notice that the instrument is ready for his signature. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as penalty. 5.2.2 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all bids have been rejected. 5.3 Submission of Bids 5.3.1 The Bid shall be sealed in an opaque envelope. The bid envelope shall be identified on the outside with the name of the project, and the name, address, and license number of the Bidder. The envelope shall contain only one bid form and will be received until the time specified and at the place specified in the Advertisement for Bids. It shall be the specific responsibility of the Bidder to deliver his sealed bid to Parish of Ascension at the

2013 IB -5

appointed place and prior to the announced time for the opening of bids. Late delivery of a bid for any reason, including late delivery by United States Mail, or express delivery, shall disqualify the bid. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof. Such bids shall be sent by Registered or Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, addressed to:

Parish of Ascension P. 0. Box 2392 Gonzales, Louisiana, 70707

Bids sent by express delivery shall be delivered to: Parish of Ascension 120 East Railroad Avenue Gonzales, Louisiana 70737

5.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time on the date for receipt of bids indicated in the Advertisement for Bids, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. 5.3.3 Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of bids. 5.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic bids are invalid and shall not receive consideration. Owner shall not consider notations written on outside of bid envelope which have the effect of amending the bid. Written modifications enclosed in the bid envelope, and signed or initialed by the Contractor or his representative, shall be accepted. 5.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid 5.4.1 A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the time stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids, for the period following the time and bid date designated for the receipt of bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his bid, except in accordance with R.S. 38:2214 which states, in part, "Bids containing patently obvious mechanical, clerical or mathematical errors may be withdrawn by the Contractor if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such errors is furnished to the public entity within forty eight hours of the Bid Opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays".

5.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, bids submitted early may be modified or withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving bids at the place and prior to the time designated for receipt of bids. 5.4.3 Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 5.4.4 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 6 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6.1 Opening of Bids 6.1.1 The properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud, and a tabulation abstract of the amounts of the base bids and alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders. 6.2 Rejection of Bids 6.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all bids and in particular to reject a bid not accompanied by any required bid security or data required by the Bid Documents or a bid in any way incomplete or irregular. 6.3 Acceptance of Bid 6.3.2 It is the intent of the Owner, if he accepts any alternates, to accept them in the order in which they are listed in the Bid Form. Determination of the Low Bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the alternates accepted. However, the Owner shall reserve the right to accept alternates in any order which does not affect determination of the Low Bidder. ARTICLE 7 POST-BID INFORMATION

2013 IB -6

7.1 Submissions 7.1.1 At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the Architect. 7.1.1.1 A designation of the work to be performed by the Contractor with his own forces. 7.1.1.2 A breakdown of the Contract cost attributable to each item listed in the Schedule of Values Form (attached). No payments will be made to the Contractor until this is received. 7.1.1.3 The proprietary names and the suppliers of principal items or systems of material and equipment proposed for the work. 7.1.1.4 A list of names and business domiciles of all Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the work. It is the preference of the Owner that, to the greatest extent possible or practical, the Contractor utilize Louisiana Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and labor. 7.1.2 The Contractor will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors to furnish and perform the work described in the sections of the Specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractor's respective trades. The General Contractor shall be responsible for actions or inactions of Subcontractors and/or material suppliers. The General Contractor is totally responsible for any lost time or extra expense incurred due to a Subcontractor's/or Material Supplier's failure to perform. Failure to perform includes, but is not limited to, a Subcontractor's financial failure, abandonment of the project, failure to make prompt delivery, or failure to do work up to standard. Under no circumstances shall the Owner mitigate the General Contractor's losses or reimburse the General Contractor for losses caused by these events. 7.1.3 Subcontractors and other persons and organizations selected by the Bidder must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall

not be changed except with the written approval of the Owner and the Architect. 7.1.4 The lowest responsive and responsible bidder shall submit to the Architect and the Owner within ten days after the bid opening a letter/letters from the manufacturer stating that the manufacturer will issue the roof system guarantee complying with the requirements of Ascension Parish Government based on the specified roof system and include the name of the applicator acceptable to the manufacturer at the highest level of certification for installing the specified roof system. This manufacturer shall be one that has received prior approval or is named in the specifications. In accordance with La. R.S. 38:2227, LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 and LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) each bidder on this project must submit the completed Attestations Affidavit (Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders, Verification of Employees and Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance) form found within this bid package. The Attestations Affidavit form shall be submitted to Ascension Parish Government within 10 days after the opening of bids. ARTICLE 8 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND 8.1 Bond Required 8.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for a Performance and Payment Bond written by a company licensed to do business in Louisiana, which shall be signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact, in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract amount. Surety must be listed currently on the U. S. Department of Treasury Financial Management Service List (Treasury List) as approved for an amount equal to or greater than the contract amount, or must be an insurance company domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. If surety is qualified other than by listing on the Treasury list, the contract amount may not exceed fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as shown by surety's most recent financial statements filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance and may not exceed the amount of $500,000. However, a Louisiana domiciled insurance company

2013 IB -7

with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide shall not be subject to the $500,000 limitation, provided that the contract amount does not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide nor fifteen percent of policyholders' surplus as shown by surety's most recent financial statements filed with the Louisiana Department of Insurance. The Bond shall be signed by the surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. The Bond shall be in favor of Parish of Ascension. 8.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bond 8.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bond to the Owner simultaneous with the execution of the Contract. 8.2.2 Bond shall be in the form furnished by Ascension Parish Government, entitled PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND, a copy of which is included in the Bid Documents. 8.2.3 The Bidder shall require the Attorney-in-Fact who executes the required bond on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of Attorney.

ARTICLE 9 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 9.1 Form to be Used 9.1.1 Form of the Contract to be used shall be furnished by Ascension Parish Government, an example of which is bound in the Bid Documents. 9..2 Award 9.2.1 Before award of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a copy of a Disclosure of Ownership Affidavit stamped by the Secretary of State, a certified copy of the minutes of the corporation or partnership meeting which authorized the party executing the bid to sign on behalf of the Contractor.

9.2.2 In accordance with Louisiana Law, when the Contract is awarded, the successful Bidder shall, at the time of the signing of the Contract, execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit included in the Contract Documents

ARTICLE 10 TAX EXEMPTIONS 10.1 In accordance with Louisiana laws, relative to the Public Bid Law, certain purchases of material and supplies by certain Contractors and Subcontractors awarded public works Contracts by a public entity are exempt from local and State taxes on public works contracts by public entities. 10.2 Enclosed herein is form entitled Designation of Construction Contractor as Agent of Government Entity and Exemption Certificate. indicating the Designation of Agency as Parish of Ascension for the period of construction outlined in Contract. 10.3 This designation of agency form when properly executed by both the Contractor and the government entity, (Parish of Ascension) for the construction period. ARTICLE 11 PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES BUSINESS 11.1 The Owner strongly encourages the participation of DBE’s (Disadvantaged Business Enterprise) in all contracts or procurements let by the Owner of goods and service and labor and material. To that end, all contractors and suppliers are encouraged to utilize DBE business enterprises in the purchase or sub-contracting of materials, supplies, services, and labor and material in which disadvantaged businesses are available

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: Ascension Parish Government 208 E. Railroad Avenue Gonzales, LA 70737

BID FOR: Ascension Parish DPW West Operations Building Project No. ENG-11-043

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: J&J Engineers and Quality Engineering & Surveying, LLC and dated:_October, 2014________

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ . TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description. Additive Alternate No. 1: Emergency Generator and Associated Transfer Switch(s) for the lump sum of:

Dollars ($ )

NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE: _______________________

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed. ** If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with La. R.S. 38:2212(A)(1)(c) or RS 38:2212(O) . BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to and made a part of this bid

2013 Page 1 of 2

Ascension Parish DPW West Operations Building ENG-11-043 Name of Project Project No. STATE OF __________________________ PARISH OF _________________________

ATTESTATIONS AFFIDAVIT

Before me, the undersigned notary public, duly commissioned and qualified in and for the parish and state aforesaid, personally came and appeared Affiant, who after being duly sworn, attested as follows: LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a

minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes: (a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66)

(b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:23)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16) (c) Theft of a business record (R.S.14:67.20) (d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (e) Issuing worthless checks (R.S. 14:71)

(f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1) (g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72) (h) Contractors; misapplication of payments (R.S. 14:202) (i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134)

LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees A. At the time of bidding, Appearer is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all new hires in the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification

system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

2013 Page 2 of 2

Ascension Parish DPW West Operations Building ENG-11-043 Name of Project Project No.

LA. R.S. 23:1726(B) Certification Regarding Unpaid Workers Compensation Insurance A. R.S. 23:1726 prohibits any entity against whom an assessment under Part X of Chapter 11 of Title 23 of the

Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 (Alternative Collection Procedures & Assessments) is in effect, and whose right to appeal that assessment is exhausted, from submitting a bid or proposal for or obtaining any contract pursuant to Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950 and Chapters 16 and 17 of Title 39 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950.

B. By signing this bid /proposal, Affiant certifies that no such assessment is in effect against the bidding / proposing

entity.

____________________________________ ________________________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

____________________________________ _________________________________________________ DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER/AFFIANT

Sworn to and subscribed before me by Affiant on the _____ day of _____________ , 20___ .

_________________________________ Notary Public

**Draft contract – Final contract subject to final negotiations and special conditions that may arise for this project, until such agreement approved by Parish Legal**

1

MASTER CONTRACT for

PUBLIC WORKS/CONSTRUCTION

BE IT KNOWN that on this ____ day of ___________________________, 2013,

Ascension Parish Government, by and through the Office of the Parish President (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "OWNER"), as approved by Resolution adopted by the Parish Council of Ascension on the 17th day of January, 2008. And ______________________________, qualified to do and doing business in this State and Parish (hereinafter referred to as "CONTRACTOR") and authorized to enter into this contract;

do hereby enter into contract under the following terms and conditions: NOTE: This Contract or Agreement governs the relationship and rights between the Parties. While there may be other Documents (for example, General Conditions) which might exist between the Parties, those documents do not control in the event or to the extent that there is any conflict or contradiction with the terms of this Agreement or Contract. In the event that there is any conflict between the terms of this Agreement/Contract and any other document between the parties, THE PARTIES AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT/CONTRACT SHALL CONTROL AND GOVERN. 1. SCOPE OF SERVICES/WORK

A. CONTRACTOR shall complete all WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Document in conjunction with: (PROJECT NAME)

B. The Scope of services to be provided by the Consultant may be entered as a scope document, or written proposal signed by both parties to this contract. The Scope shall be attached hereto as an Exhibit and made a part hereof as if written herein in full. All work shall be under the direction of the ___________ of the _______________ Department, hereinafter called the PROJECT MANAGER, and all plans,


2

specifications, and the like shall be submitted to him, and all approvals and administration of this contract shall be through him.

C. The compensation to the Provider for these services shall be set out in the attached scope document, Task Order, or written proposal signed by both parties to this contract.

D. There will be absolutely no fees or charges paid to Provider to cover overhead costs,

general expenses, capital expenses, expenses for principal/branch/field offices, employees salaries, direct and indirect costs, additional costs or profit of any nature whatsoever. In each case, the work is initiated only upon receipt of a written work order from the PROJECT MANAGER, all which must include the maximum fee to be charged.

2. TERM OF CONTRACT

A. The Work will be substantially completed within ____ calendar days from the date identified on the Notice to proceed from the Engineer.

B. The Notice to Proceed shall be issued within thirty (30) days from the

execution of this contract unless the Owner or Owner’s representative and the Contractor agree in writing to another specified date.

C. This construction contract shall terminate upon final acceptance by the

engineer and all justified payments are made to contractor.

3. ENGINEER

A. The Drawings have been prepared by Engineer, PEO., the (Firm name and address of Engineer on project) who is hereinafter call ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER’S representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4. PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit and strictly adhere to a project construction schedule throughout the allocated contract and associated time frame. CONTRACTOR is aware that OWNER may have a representative at each site where WORK is being performed and that CONTRACTOR needs to coordinate with the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE or PROJECT MANAGER where Work on the CONTRACT


3

will be performed. CONTRACTOR will coordinate with the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE by strictly following the project construction schedule or Progress Schedule. OWNER recognizes and understands that changes in project construction schedule or Progress Schedule may become necessary during the course of the project. However, in the event of any such change, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE in writing of a proposed change. Said written notice shall be provided at least 12 hours prior to the revised construction activity. Said notice shall be provided by emailing notice of change to (email address of contact) and (email address of contact) and other contacts including testing company that is a team for member for the project.

B. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to timely notify the OWNER’S

REPRESENTATIVE of such change, the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will document the CONTRACTOR’S failure to notify of the change in work and SHALL assess stipulated damages as follows. For EACH failure to notify the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE of any change in the project construction schedule or Progress Schedule, the CONTRACTOR AGREES TO PAY $150.00 per failure to notify the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR agrees that these stipulated damages reflect the lost time, manpower, and mileage incurred by OWNER attempting to locate the CONTRACTOR where a change in schedule occurs and the required notice was not provided. CONTRACTOR further agrees that said amount shall be paid by directly reducing the amount of monthly invoices/pay applications by the amount of penalties issued. The Penalty fees shall be itemized on monthly invoices.

5. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and the OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in section 2 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the contract conditions and approved time changes thereto. There are delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amount of Eight Hundred Fifty ($850.00) Dollars for each day that expires after the time specified in section 2 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.

6. CONTRACT PRICE


4

A. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents in the amount specified therein, subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents or amendments thereto. This is unit price contract based on the estimated quantities and unit cost awarded with an estimated total of $_______________.

7. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions.

B. Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR’S Applications for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction. All progress payments will be on the basis of progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in each case of Unite Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. Payment will be made on work that that been installed, inspected, tested, verified, and done so to the satisfaction of the engineer.

C. Pursuant to La. R.S. 38:2248 (Public Contract Law), Owner shall withhold retainage

from each progress payment until payment is due under terms and conditions governing substantial completion or final payment. Retainage shall be ten percent of the amount of work completed to date if the contract amount is up to $500,000 and five percent of the work complete to date if the contract amount is over $500,000.

D. Fuel or Asphalt/Concrete Adjustments. There shall be NO adjustments for prices

or costs of any fuel or asphalt/concrete on this project, arising out of the work on this project/contract, or arising out of this contract. Further, the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any price adjustment for fuel or asphalt/concrete or the ability or right to request any price adjustment for fuel or asphalt/concrete. Particularly, the Louisiana DOTD provisions (or any such or similar provisions by any other third party) pertaining to or related to fuel or asphalt/concrete adjustments are not part of this contract, are not incorporated by reference or otherwise in this Contract, and shall not apply in any form or fashion to the contract. Any language in this Contract which implies that the CONTRACTOR may obtain an adjustment in price for fuel or asphalt/concrete is hereby to be interpreted that CONTRACTOR shall not receive any such adjustment. CONTRACTOR shall not assert that any language in the CONTRACT creates any vagueness or ambiguity in the CONTRACT entitling


5

CONTRACTOR to price adjustments for fuel or asphalt/concrete. CONTRACTOR hereby waives any right or ability to request any price adjustment for fuel or asphalt/concrete and CONTRACTOR shall not submit any request for any change in price for fuel or asphalt/concrete adjustments to the OWNER in any form.

E. Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance

with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions SC-9.03(B) (13). OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER.

F. There shall be no fees charged by, nor paid to, CONTRACTOR for consultation with

the Parish. G. CONTRACTOR hereby agrees that the responsibility for payment of taxes from the

funds thus received under this agreement shall be said CONTRACTOR’S obligation and identified under Federal Tax Identification Number as listed in the Scope.

H. The Parish agrees to make payment to CONTRACTOR for services upon receipt and

approval of each invoice. The Parish will pay CONTRACTOR the amount due and payable within thirty (30) days or unless a conflict results in a delay of payment. Upon receipt of each invoice, the Parish shall have the right and opportunity to review, confirm or otherwise determine the accuracy of each invoice and performance of service. In the event that the Parish disputes or otherwise may question the accuracy of each invoice or quality of all work performed, the Parish may withhold payment of any invoice until a successful and satisfactory resolution can be had between the parties. Parish agrees to not unreasonably withhold payments of any invoice.

I. Other than the fee schedule herein, there will be absolutely no additional fees due

CONTRACTOR to cover its overhead costs, general expenses, capital expenses, expenses for principal/branch/field offices, employees salaries, direct and indirect costs, additional costs or profit of any nature whatsoever in excess of the previously agreed hourly rate.

6. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVES In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations:

A. CONTRACTOR is familiar with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents. Work site, locality and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may


6

affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.

B. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies, or similar information or date in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.3 of the General Conditions.

C. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,

investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

D. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, or

discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.

7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents which comprise of the contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, attached hereto and made a part hereof, consist of the documents listed in Table of Contents, and the documents identified below.

a. CONTRACTOR Bid Documents b. Bid Bonds c. Agreement d. Payment Bond e. Performance Bond f. Notice of Award g. Notice to Proceed h. Technical Specifications prepared by engineer i. Standard General Conditions j. Drawings prepared by engineers

8. CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish sufficient as-built sets of plans, specifications & contract document.


7

B. All data collected by the CONTRACTOR and all documents, notes, drawings, tracings, and files shall remain the property of the Owner except as otherwise provided herein. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the PROJECT MANAGER originals of any project documents used in completion of the project or in any way related to this project to the Project Manager.

C. The Owner shall furnish without charge all standard plans and specifications and any

other information which the Owner now has in its files which may be of use to the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR has the duty to and must confirm and verify all information contained therein.

D. Construction Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall use the most current versions of the

standard forms of documents adopted and specified by the Owner in the performance of the Contract, all as of the date of the signing of this contract. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in any other provision of this contract, none of the contract documents provided by the Owner are or will become the property of the CONTRACTOR but shall remain the property of the Owner to the extent the Owner has a property interest therein.

E. Notwithstanding any Section hereinafter, there will be retention of all related records:

(1) All records, reports, documents and other material delivered or transmitted

to CONTRACTOR by Parish shall remain the property of Parish, and shall be returned by CONTRACTOR to Parish, at CONTRACTOR’S expense, at termination or expiration of this contract. All records, reports, documents, exhibits or other material related to this contract and/or obtained or prepared by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance of the services contracted for herein shall become the property of Parish, and shall be returned by CONTRACTOR to Parish, at CONTRACTOR’S expense, at termination or expiration of this contract.

(2) The Parish and CONTRACTOR acknowledge and agree that the Parish

has the right to review retain all records, reports, worksheets or any other material of either party related to this contract. CONTRACTOR further agrees that CONTRACTOR will furnish to the Parish copies of any and all records, reports, worksheets, bills, statements or any other material of CONTRACTOR or Parish related to this contract.

(3) CONTRACTOR shall maintain all books, documents, papers, accounting

records and other evidence pertaining to costs incurred and shall make such materials available at its offices at any reasonable time for inspection and copying by the Parish.


8

(4) CONTRACTOR shall retain all of its records and supporting

documentation applicable to this contract with the Parish for a period of five (5) years after termination of the contract in accordance with state law, except as follows:

(a) Records that are subject to Federal Funds and/or audit findings shall be retained for five (5) years after such findings have been resolved, close out has been issued. (b) All such records and supporting documentation shall be made readily available for inspection, copying or audit by representatives of the Parish. In the event the CONTRACTOR goes out of existence, it shall turn over to the Parish all of its records relating to this contract to be retained by the Parish for the required period of time.

F. In the event there is re-use of any documents created by CONTRACTOR,

CONTRACTOR invokes the privileges afforded it as per La. Revised Statute R.S. 38:2317.

G. The Parish agrees not to use CONTRACTOR’S work product on any other project without the express written notice to the CONTRACTOR.

H. All of CONTRACTOR’S pre-existing or proprietary computer programs, software,

information, standard details or material developed by CONTRACTOR outside of this agreement shall remain the exclusive property of the CONTRACTOR.

9. NON-ASSIGNABILITY

A. CONTRACTOR shall not assign nor transfer any interest in this contract (whether by assignment or novation) without prior written consent of the Parish, provided however, that claims for money due or to become due to the CONTRACTOR from the Parish under this contract may be assigned to a bank, trust company, or other financial institution without such prior written consent. Notice of any such assignment or transfer shall be furnished promptly to the Parish.

B. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically


9

stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.

C. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

10. BUDGET LIMITATION

It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to advise the Parish in advance if contract funds or contract terms may be insufficient to complete contract objectives. CONTRACTOR understands and specifically warrants that it assumes the sole responsibility to advise the Parish in advance if contract funds or contract terms may be insufficient to complete contract objectives. In providing opinions of probable construction cost, the Parish understands that the CONTRACTOR has no control over costs and price of labor, equipment or materials or over the general CONTRACTOR’S method of pricing, and that the opinion of probable costs provided herein are made on the basis of the CONTRACTOR’S qualifications and experience.

The continuation of this contract is contingent upon the appropriation of funds by the Parish to fulfill the requirements of the contract. If the Parish fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for the continuation of this or any other related contract, or if such appropriation is reduced by the veto of Parish President by any means provided in the appropriations Ordinance to prevent the total appropriation for the year from exceeding revenues for that year, or for any other lawful purpose, and the effect of such reduction is to provide insufficient monies for the continuation of the contract, the contract shall terminate on the date of the beginning of the first fiscal year for which funds are not appropriated.

11. INSURANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall secure and maintain at its expense such insurance that will protect it and the Parish from claims under the Workmen’s Compensation Acts and from claims for bodily injury, death or property damage which may arise from the performance of services under this agreement. All certificates of insurance shall be furnished to the Parish and shall provide that insurance shall not be canceled without thirty (30) days prior notice of cancellation given to the Parish of Ascension, in writing, on all of the required coverage provided to Ascension Parish. Where possible, all policies and notices should name the CONTRACTOR and Parish. The Parish may examine the policies at any time.


10

B. All policies and certificates of insurance shall contain the following clauses:

1. The CONTRACTOR’S insurers will have no right of recovery or subrogation against the Parish of Ascension, it being the intention of the parties that the insurance policy so affected shall protect both parties and be the primary coverage for any and all losses covered by the below described insurance.

2. The Parish of Ascension shall be named as additional named insured with

respect to automobile and general liability.

3. The insurance companies issuing the policy or policies shall have no recourse against the Parish of Ascension for payment of any premiums or for assessments under any form of policy.

4. Any and all deductible in the described insurance policies shall be

assumed by and be at the sole risk of the CONTRACTOR.

C. Prior to the execution of this agreement, the CONTRACTOR shall provide at its own expense, proof of the following insurance coverage required by the contract to the Parish of Ascension by insurance companies authorized to do business in the State of Louisiana. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with an A.M. Best rating of no less than B+. 1. Worker s compensation Insurance: As required by Louisiana State Statute

exception; employer’s liability shall be at least $500,000 per occurrence. 2. Commercial General Liability Insurance with a Combined Single Limit of

at least $1,000,000.00 per Occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. This insurance shall include coverage for bodily injury and property damage, and indicate on the certificate of insurance the following:

a) Premises - operations; b) Broad form contractual liability; c) Products and completed operations; d) Personal Injury; e) Broad form property damage; f) Explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Not needed for design


11

3. Business Automobile Liability Insurance with a Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000 per Occurrence for bodily injury and property damage, unless otherwise indicated. This insurance shall include for bodily injury and property damage the following coverage:

a) Any automobiles; b) Owned automobiles; c) Hired automobiles; d) Non-owned automobiles; e) Uninsured motorist.

4. An umbrella policy or excess policy may be used to meet minimum

requirements where applicable. 5. All policies of insurance shall meet the requirements of the Parish of

Ascension prior to the commencing of any work. The Parish of Ascension has the right, but not the duty, to approve all insurance policies prior to commencing of any work. If at any time, it becomes known that any of the said policies shall be or becomes unsatisfactory to the Parish of Ascension as to form or substance; or if a company issuing any such policy shall be or become unsatisfactory to the Parish of Ascension, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly obtain a new policy, timely submit same to the Parish of Ascension for approval and submit a certificate thereof as provided above. The Parish agrees to not unreasonably withhold approval of any insurance carrier selected by CONTRACTOR. In the event that Parish cannot agree or otherwise authorize said carrier, CONTRACTOR shall have the option of selecting and submitting new insurance carrier within 30 days of said notice by the Parish. In the event that the second submission is insufficient or is not approved, then the Parish shall have the unilateral opportunity to thereafter select a responsive and responsible insurance carrier all at the cost of CONTRACTOR and thereafter deduct from CONTRACTOR’S fee the cost of such insurance.

6. Upon failure of CONTRACTOR to furnish, deliver and/or maintain such

insurance as above provided, this contract, at the election of the Parish of Ascension, may be forthwith declared suspended, discontinued or terminated. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to maintain insurance shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from any liability under the contract, nor shall the insurance requirements be construed to conflict with the obligation of the CONTRACTOR concerning indemnification.


12

7. WAIVER: Except as otherwise provided by law, the coverage requirements of this section may be waived in whole or in part on agreements under $50,000.00, and the Parish is authorized to use its discretion in regard to insurance requirements for such contracts. Except as otherwise provided by law, the Parish President or the Parish Chief Administrative Officer is authorized to omit in whole or in part the insurance requirements of this section in connection with such contracts.

D. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a current copy of all annual insurance policies

and provide same to the Parish of Ascension on an annual basis or as may be reasonably requested.

12. OTHER TERMS AND CONDITIONS

A. Licenses and Commissions. The CONTRACTOR shall, at all times during the term of this contract, maintain valid Louisiana licenses and commissions as are customarily required of such a CONTRACTOR, including but not limited to those that may be required by this State and/or Parish. The CONTRACTOR agrees to renew and or keep current all licenses and commissions herein. The CONTRACTOR agrees to maintain a copy of all such licenses or commissions on file at all time and make same available for review as may be reasonably requested by the Parish of Ascension.

B. The professional and technical adequacy and accuracy of designs, drawings,

specifications, documents, and other work products furnished under this agreement will be conducted in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of the profession in the Baton Rouge Metropolitan area including the parishes surrounding Ascension Parish. In the event the Parish must have work done by change order or addition resulting from an error or omission by the CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall provide, at no cost to Parish, all professional services attributable to the change order. This is in addition to Parish’s right to recover from CONTRACTOR any damages for its errors and omissions.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify, and hold the Parish harmless from

against any and all actions, claims, demands, complaints, or lawsuits of any kind (whether in tort or in contract) for any sums of money, costs, liabilities, judgments, fines, or penalties asserted or alleged by any person, party, entity, firm or generation for any damage, injury, claim, or cause of action (of any kind) including, but not limited to, pecuniary and non-pecuniary damages/losses to person or property which are alleged to have been caused by or which were


13

caused by or (wholly or partially), which grow out of, which arise from, or which result from any negligent acts, errors, or omissions by CONTRACTOR, its agents, servants, or employees while engaged in connection with services required to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under this agreement. This paragraph is to be broadly interpreted to include any and all causes of action which result wholly or partially from the conduct or the CONTRACTOR.

D. This agreement shall be binding upon the successors and assigns for the parties

hereto.

E. This agreement represents the entire Agreement between Parish and CONTRACTOR.

F. If there is any dispute concerning this agreement, the laws of Louisiana shall

apply. The exclusive venue and jurisdiction for all lawsuits, claims, disputes, and other matters in questions between the parties to this agreement or any breach thereof shall be in the 23rd Judicial District Court for the Parish of Ascension, State of Louisiana. It is also understood and agreed that the laws and ordinances of Ascension shall apply.

G. In the event that the CONTRACTOR modifies the Parish’s contract documents

without the expressed prior written consent of the Parish, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless the Parish from any claims, lawsuits, or damages that arise out of or are attributable to the modification. This indemnification and hold harmless obligation shall include not only the damages suffered by the Parish but also all reasonable expenses including, but not limited to, any and all litigation or other dispute resolution costs and any and all professional fees incurred by the Parish as a result of the CONTRACTOR’S deviation from the Parish’s contract documents.

H. CONTRACTOR agrees to a covenant against contingent fees. CONTRACTOR

warrants that it has not employed or retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for the CONTRACTOR, to solicit or secure this Contract, and that it has not paid or agreed to pay any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for the CONTRACTOR, any fee, commission, percentage, brokerage fee, gifts, or any other consideration, contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Contract. For breach or violation of this warranty, the Parish shall have the right to annul this contract without liability.

I. This contract may be amended only by mutual written consent of the respective


14

parties.

J. Third Party Beneficiary: it is specifically agreed by and between the parties to this contract that no person or party is intended, deemed, considered, or construed to be a third party beneficiary of this contract.

K. Neither party will be liable for failure to fulfill its obligations when due to causes

beyond its reasonable control.

L. Any failure or delay by either party in exercising any right or remedy will not constitute a waiver.

M. Severability: if any provision or item in this contract is held invalid or

unenforceable for any reason, then such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect other provisions or items of this contract. In such event, the remaining portions shall be given full force and effect without the invalid provision or item, and to this end the provisions or items of this contract are hereby declared severable.

N. It is specifically understood that the terms "agreement" and "contract" may be

used interchangeably. It is specifically understood that the terms “Owner”, “PROJECT MANAGER” and "Parish" and "the Parish of Ascension" may be used interchangeably.

O. Conflict of Interest: it is understood and agreed between the parties hereto that

CONTRACTOR is not retained exclusively by the Parish but that the Parish may retain other CONTRACTORS during the term of this Contract. In the event of reasonably known conflicts of interest or potential conflicts of interest between the Parish and other parties who have engaged CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR agrees to make full disclosure of the same, and that they will take no action on behalf of any other client directly adverse to the Parish, nor will CONTRACTOR take any action on behalf of the Parish directly adverse to any other client.

P. CONTRACTOR warrants that CONTRACTOR is qualified to perform the

intended purposes of this agreement. In the event that CONTRACTOR becomes not fit nor qualified for any reason whatsoever, then CONTRACTOR agrees to withdraw from work herein at no cost to the Parish. In the event that the Parish determines that CONTRACTOR is not suited for Parish purposes or otherwise fails to represent Parish policies to the satisfaction of the Parish, then CONTRACTOR agrees to withdraw from this agreement.


15

Q. CONTRACTOR specifically agrees and understands that CONTRACTOR shall

not maintain or otherwise claim that it possesses any security interest in any aspect of the work that forms the basis of this agreement.

R. CONTRACTOR agrees to ensure that its personnel are, at all times, educated and

trained, and further, that CONTRACTOR and its personnel will perform all work and services in a workmanlike and professional manner.

S. CONTRACTOR recognizes and understands that time is of the essence.

CONTRACTOR agrees to perform and provide services in accordance with this agreement and all incorporated attachments.

T. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any and all losses and damages suffered

or incurred by the Parish, including but not limited to all costs, attorney’s fees, out of pocket expenses, any & all Parish employee time, and any other expenditure by the Parish to defend, remedy, repair, replace, correct, or cure any condition or liability created or arising out of the actions or omissions to act of the CONTRACTOR, it’s agents, officer, servants, or employees. This includes the payment of any cost or fees of any type or kind incurred by the Parish in defending any lawsuit, complaint, claim, claim filed or arising out of the action or omission to act of the CONTRACTOR.

U. CONTRACTOR agrees that it will be responsible for all of its own actual and

reasonably related expenses for its on & off-site office work. CONTRACTOR further agrees that Parish will not be responsible for or in any way liable for CONTRACTOR’S payroll costs, indirect or direct expenses, overhead, or any other amounts associated with CONTRACTOR’S business other than the specific fees & costs generated under the terms of this agreement.

13. TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION

A. Termination for Cause

The Parish may terminate this Contract for cause based upon the failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with the terms and/or conditions of the Contract, provided that the Parish shall give the CONTRACTOR written notice specifying the failure. If within thirty (30) days after receipt of such notice, the CONTRACTOR shall not have corrected such failure and thereafter proceeded diligently to complete such correction, then the Parish may, at its sole and exclusive option, place the CONTRACTOR in default and this contract shall


16

terminate on the date specified in such notice. Work to be performed during this 30-day period shall not proceed without the actual knowledge of the Parish and specifically supervised by the Parish. Any work performed by CONTRACTOR during this period without the actual knowledge of the Parish and not under the supervision of the Parish shall not be compensated nor honored; CONTRACTOR specifically waives and forfeits any and all claims to payment, compensation, quantum merit, and/or reimbursement from the Parish of any work performed during this period in violation of this paragraph. CONTRACTOR agrees and understands specifically that satisfactory performance shall be unilaterally and exclusively determined by the Parish.

B. Termination for Convenience

Notwithstanding any other section herein, the Parish may terminate this contract at any time for any reason whatsoever by giving thirty (30) days written notice to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to payment for deliverables in progress; to the extent work has been actually and satisfactorily performed.

C. Right to Cancel

(1) The continuation of this contract is contingent upon the appropriation of funds to fulfill the requirements of the contract by the Parish. If the Parish fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for the continuation of this or any other contract, or if such appropriation is reduced by the veto of Parish President by any means provided in the appropriations Ordinance to prevent the total appropriation for the year from exceeding revenues for that year, or for any other lawful purpose, and the effect of such reduction is to provide insufficient monies for the continuation of the contract, the contract shall terminate on the date of the beginning of the first fiscal year for which funds are not appropriated. It is understood and agreed that the paragraph below may preempt this paragraph, all at the exclusive and unilateral option of the Parish.

(2) Either party shall have the right to cancel this contract, with or without

cause, by giving the other party (30) days written notice.

D. Additional Causes for Termination or suspension:

1. Either party shall have the right to cancel this contract, with or without cause, by giving the other party (30) days written notice. Parish has the


17

right to cancel this contract upon less than thirty (30) days due to budgetary reductions and changes in funding priorities by the Parish.

2. By mutual agreement and consent of the parties hereto. 3. By the Parish as a consequence of the CONTRACTOR’S failure to

comply with the terms, progress or quality of work in a satisfactory manner, proper allowances being made for circumstances beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR.

4. By either party upon failure to fulfill its obligations as set forth in this contract

5. In the event of the abandonment of the project by the Parish. 6. A Stop Work Order can be immediately issued by the Parish if they deem

it necessary to protect the health, safety, and welfare of the community.

E. Upon termination, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for actual work performed prior to the notice of termination on a pro-rata share of the basic fee based on the phase or percentage of work actually completed.

F. Upon termination, the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the Parish all original

documents, notes, drawings, tracings, computer files, and files except the CONTRACTOR’S personal and administrative files.

G. Should the Parish desire to suspend the work, but not definitely terminate the

contract, this may be done by thirty (30) days notice given by the Parish to that effect, and the work may be reinstated and resumed in full force & effect upon receipt from the Parish of thirty (30) days notice in writing to that effect. CONTRACTOR shall receive no additional compensation during the suspension period. The parties agree to revisit the terms of this contract during the suspension period which shall not exceed six (6) months, unless mutually agreed upon.

H. There is a right to cancel by the Parish by giving thirty (30) days notice to

Provider and paying undisputed fees due for services on that portion of the work that has been satisfactorily, timely and/or professionally completed, all in the exclusive discretion of the Parish at any time herein.

I. In the event of a default and/or breach of this agreement and this matter is

forwarded to legal counsel, then the prevailing party may be entitled to collect a reasonable attorney fees and all costs associated therewith whether or not litigation is initiated. Attorney fees shall be based upon the current, reasonable prevailing rate for counsel as provided on the fee schedule of the Louisiana Attorney General or in the private sector, whichever is greater. The parties agree


18

to be responsible for such attorney fees, together for all with legal interest from date of agreement breach, plus all costs of collection.

J. Termination or cancellation of this agreement will not affect any rights or duties

arising under any term or condition herein. K. As to the filing of bankruptcy, voluntarily or involuntarily, by CONTRACTOR,

CONTRACTOR agrees that if any execution or legal process is levied upon its interest in this contract, or if any liens or privileges are filed against its interest, or if a petition in bankruptcy is filed against it, or if it is adjudicated bankrupt in involuntary proceedings, or if it should breach this contract in any material respect, the Parish shall have the right, at its unilateral option, to immediately cancel and terminate this contract. In the event that CONTRACTOR is placed in any chapter of bankruptcy, voluntarily or involuntarily, or otherwise triggers any provision of the preceding sentence herein, it is understood and agreed that all materials, goods and/or services provided shall be and remain the property of the Parish. All rights of CONTRACTOR as to goods, wares, products, services, materials and the like supplied to Parish shall be deemed forfeited.

14. AUDITORS

Notwithstanding other Sections herein, CONTRACTOR shall maintain all records for a period of three years after the date of final payment under this contract. It is hereby agreed that the Parish Department of Finance or its designated auditor shall have the sole, unilateral and exclusive option of auditing all accounts of CONTRACTOR which relate to this contract. Such audit may be commenced at any reasonable time. CONTRACTOR agrees not to delay, retard, interrupt or unduly interfere with commencement and completion of such an audit. If in the exclusive and unilateral opinion of the Parish that CONTRACTOR delays, retards, interferes with or otherwise interrupts such an audit, the Parish may seek such relief as per law. In such an event, CONTRACTOR agrees to be liable for all reasonable attorney fees, costs of auditors, court costs, and any other reasonably related expenses with such litigation.

15. DISCRIMINATION CLAUSE

CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 and any current amendments thereto. All individuals shall have equal access to employment opportunities available to a similarly suited individual. CONTRACTOR agrees not to discriminate in its employment practices, and will render services under this contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, veteran status, political affiliation, or disabilities. Any act of discrimination committed by CONTRACTOR, or


19

failure to comply with these statutory obligations when applicable shall be grounds for termination of this contract. CONTRACTOR agrees to abide by the requirements of all local, state, and/or federal law, including but not limited to the following: Title VI and VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended by the Equal Opportunity Act of 1972, Federal Executive Order 11246, the Federal Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, the Vietnam Era Veteran's Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, the Age Act of 1975, and the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that it is an Equal Employment Opportunity employer. In all hiring or employment made possible by or resulting from this Contract, there shall not be any discrimination against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age or veterans status; and where applicable, affirmative action will be taken to ensure that CONTRACTOR’S employees are treated equally during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age, political affiliation, disabilities or veteran status. This requirement shall apply to but not be limited to the following: employment upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. All solicitations or advertisements for employees shall state that all applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, disability, age or veteran status.

16. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR

A. While in the performance of services or carrying out obligations herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be acting in the capacity of an independent contractor and not as an employee of the Parish. The Parish shall not be obliged to any person, firm or corporation for any obligations of the CONTRACTOR arising from the performance of its services under this agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall not be authorized to represent the Parish with respect to services being performed, dealings with other agencies, and administration of specifically related contracts, unless done so in writing by the Parish.

B. CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to be responsible for payment of taxes from the

funds thus received under this Contract. CONTRACTOR agrees to be responsible for and to pay all applicable federal income taxes, federal social security tax (or self-employment taxes in lieu thereof) and any other applicable federal or state unemployment taxes. CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the Parish harmless for any and all federal and/or state income tax liability, including taxes, interest and penalties, resulting from the Parish's treatment of CONTRACTOR as independent contractor.


20

C. CONTRACTOR further agrees to reimburse Parish for any and all costs it incurs, including, but not limited to, accounting fees and legal fees, in defending itself against any such liability.

D. CONTRACTOR agrees and acknowledges that it (and its employees) is an

independent contractor as defined in R.S. 23: 1021 (or any other provision of law) and as such nothing herein shall make CONTRACTOR an employee of the Parish nor create a partnership between CONTRACTOR and the Parish.

E. CONTRACTOR acknowledges exclusion of Workmen's Compensation

Coverage. CONTRACTOR acknowledges of the exclusion of Unemployment Compensation coverage.

F. CONTRACTOR agrees to a waiver of any and all sick and annual benefits from

the Parish. It is expressly agreed and understood between the parties entering into this personal service contract, that CONTRACTOR, acting as an independent agent, shall not receive any sick and annual leave from the Parish.

17. NOTICES

All notices shall be by certified mail, return receipt requested, and sent to the following individuals at the following addresses. Changes of person and addresses are to be exchanged in a like manner:

Parish of Ascension: Office of the Parish President

P.O. Box 1659 Gonzales, LA 70707

Contractor: (insert company name)

18. AUTHORITY TO ENTER CONTRACT

The undersigned representative of CONTRACTOR warrants and personally guarantees that he/she has the requisite and necessary authority to enter and sign this contract on behalf of the corporate entity. The undersigned parties warrant and represent that they each have the respective authority and permission to enter this agreement. The Parish shall require, as an additional provision, that CONTRACTOR provide a certified copy of a corporate resolution authorizing the undersigned to enter and sign this agreement in the event that CONTRACTOR is a member of a corporation, partnership, LLC, LLP, and


21

any other juridical entity. This agreement is executed in two (2) originals. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, they have executed this agreement, the day and year first above written. WITNESSES __________________________ ________________________

Title: Parish President __________________________ Ascension Parish Government Date: __________________ WITNESSES ___________________________ ________________________

Title: ____________________ ___________________________ Company Name License No. Date: ____________________

of 1

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - CONTRACTOR

(R.S. 38:2224) STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF ____________________ BE IT KNOWN, that on this __________ day of _______________, ______, before me the undersigned Notary Public, duly commissioned and qualified, within and for the Parish of _________________, State of Louisiana, personally came and appeared ______________________, as the duly authorized agent of ___________________________, who after being by me first duly sworn, did depose and say:

That _________________________________ has/have been selected as Contractor for the PROJECT NAME:___________________________________________________________; PROJECT NO. ___________________________ and that affiant employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization, either directly or indirectly to secure the public contract under which he received payment, other than persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction, alteration or demolition of the public building or project or in securing the public contract were in the regular course or their duties for affiant; and That no part of the contract price received by affiant was paid or will be paid to any person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the contract, other than the payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction, alternation or demolition of the public building or project were in the regular course of their duties for affiant. APPEARER FURTHER DECLARES, that they will, in all respects, comply with the public contract laws of the State of Louisiana, including Title 38 of the Louisiana Statutes, and particularly Section 2224, as amended, of such Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes.

WITNESSES: ______________________________ ______________________________ BY: __________________________ Sworn to and subscribed before me this ___________ day of ________________, 2012. ______________________________ Notary Public

Ascension Parish DPW I.D. OF BIDDER/CORPORATE RESOLUTION West Operations Building Project No. ENG-11-043 Page 1 of 3

Construction Document October, 2014

I.D. of Bidder/Corporate Resolution

PROJECT TITLE: Ascension Parish DPW West Operations Building BIDDER IS:

INDIVIDUAL By: (Signature Individual)

Name:

Doing business as:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

PARTNERSHIP

Firm Name:

By: (Signature of General Partner)

General Partner(s) Name:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

CORPORATION

Corporation Name:

State of Incorporation:

By: (Signature -attach evidence of authority to sign)

Name of person authorized to sign:

Business Address:

Telephone No.: **(Corporate Resolution (PAGE 00320-3) Must Be Attached)



BIDDER IS:

LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

Company Name:

By: (Signature -attach evidence of authority to sign)

Member Name:

Business Address:

Telephone No.:

JOINT VENTURE

Member(s) Name:

Address:

Member(s) Name:

Address:



IF BID IS BY A CORPORATION, THE CORPORATION RESOLUTION (PAGE 00320-3) MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID.

CORPORATE RESOLUTION

BE IT RESOLVED by the Board of Directors of ,

a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of ,and domiciled in the

city of , that _________________________ President of the

Corporation and/or _______________________________ of the Corporation, be, and are hereby

authorized and empowered to submit bids and to execute any and all contracts of whatever kind

on behalf of the Corporation and to do all things necessary in the premises.

The following resolution was offered, duly seconded and, after discussion, was

unanimously adopted by said quorum:

CERTIFICATE

I, , Secretary of _______________________ do

hereby certify that the foregoing resolution is a true and exact copy unanimously

adopted by the Board of Directors of said Corporation at a meeting thereof legally

held on the day of , 20__, that said resolution is duly entered

into the records of said corporation; that it has not been rescinded or modified; and

that it is now in full force and effect.

IN TESTIMONY THEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of said

corporation this _________ day of _____________________ , 20___

Secretary

Ascension Parish DPW NOTICE OF AWARD West Operations Building Project No. ENG-11-043 Page 1 of 1


NOTICE OF AWARD TO: ___ _____ ___ _______ ___ ____________ PROJECT Description: Ascension Parish DPW West Operations Building The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above described WORK in response to its Invitation for Bids dated ____________, and Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your BID has been accepted for items in the amount of $ . You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required CONTRACTOR'S Performance BOND, Payment BOND and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said BONDS within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER's acceptance of your BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your BID BOND. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER.

Dated this day of , 20 .

Ascension Parish Government Owner

By: ________________________________ Tommy Martinez Title: Parish President

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE

Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged By this the day of , 20 . By Title

Ascension Parish DPW NOTICE TO PROCEED West Operations Building Project No. ENG-11-043 Page 1 of 1


NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: DATE: Project: You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated , 20 , on or before , 20 , and you are to complete the WORK within Three Hundred (300) consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore , 20 .

Ascension Parish Government Owner

__________________________________

By Tommy Martinez

Title Parish President

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by , this the , 20 By Title

RECOMMENDATION OF ACCEPTANCE

TO: PARISH OF ASCENSION FROM: Jatinder Goel (J&J Engineers, Inc.)

P.O. Box 1659 5932 Kellywood Oaks Dr. Gonzales, LA 70707 Baton Rouge, LA 70817

Design Firm Name and Address DATE: __________________

PROJECT NAME & NUMBER: _________________________________________________________________

CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________

FINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ ____________________________________

FINAL BUILDING AREA (SQ. FEET):___________________________________________________ I certify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, this project is substantially complete in accordance with the Plans and Specifications to the point where it can be used for the purpose which was intended. It is recommended that it be accepted. DATE OF ACCEPTANCE:______________________________________________________________

CONTRACT DATE OF COMPLETION:___________________________________________________

NUMBER OF DAYS (OVERRUN) (UNDERRUN) (As of Acceptance Date)_______________________

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY STIPULATED IN CONTRACT $____________________

VALUE OF PUNCH LIST $ (Attach punch list)

Was part of project occupied prior to Acceptance?

PORTION OCCUPIED: (Attach Partial Occupancy Forms)

ROOF GUAR-MANUF: START DATE: END DATE:

ROOFER: START DATE: END DATE:

Signed:___________________________________ ARCHITECT

Signed:___________________________________

OWNER

RA-1

Ascension Parish Government

PARTIAL OCCUPANCY PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER: CMFS No. CONTRACTOR:

USER AGENCY: The below described portion of subject project is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, complete to a point where the User desires to use in according with the Contract Documents. DATE OCCUPIED: ______________________ .

WARRANTY items covered by Occupancy:

____________________________________________ Architect Date

____________________________________________

Contractor Date

____________________________________________ Owner Date

Punch List: Attached

None

PO-1

2013 SC 1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. Articles, Paragraphs, Subparagraphs or Clauses modified or deleted have the same numerical designation as those occurring in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS In Subparagraph 1.1.1 delete the third sentence, and add the following sentence: The Contract Documents shall include the Bid Documents as listed in the Instructions to Bidders and any modifications made thereto by addenda.

1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE [REFER TO R.S. 38:2317]

1.5.1 Delete the first sentence of the paragraph. 1.5.1 In the third sentence: delete the remainder after the word “publication”.

ARTICLE 2

OWNER 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete this paragraph. 2.2.2 In the first sentence, delete: all before “…the Owner shall secure…”

ARTICLE 3

CONTRACTOR

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

2013 SC 2

3.4.2 Delete this paragraph. 3.4.3 Delete this paragraph and substitute with the following: Contractor and its employees, officers, agents, representatives, and Subcontractors shall conduct themselves in an appropriate and professional manner, in accordance with the Owner’s requirements, at all times while working on the Project. Any such individual who behaves in an inappropriate manner or who engages in the use of inappropriate language or conduct while on Owner’s property, as determined by the Owner, shall be removed from the Project at the Owner’s request. Such individual shall not be permitted to return without the written permission of the Owner. The Owner shall not be responsible or liable to Contractor or any Subcontractor for any additional costs, expenses, losses, claims or damages incurred by Contractor or its Subcontractor as a result of the removal of an individual from the Owner’s property pursuant to this paragraph. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS (R.S. 40:1724[A]) 3.7.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.7.1 3.7.2 Delete Subparagraph 3.7.5 and substitute the following: 3.7.5 If, during the course of the Work, the Contractor discovers human remains, unmarked burial or archaeological sites, burial artifacts, or wetlands, which are not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow all procedures mandated by State and Federal law, including but not limited to L.R.S. 8:671 et seq., R.S. 49:213.1 et seq., and Sections 401 & 404 of the Federal Clean Water Act. Request for adjustment of the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features shall be submitted in writing to the Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents. 3.8 ALLOWANCES Delete Subparagraph 3.8.1, 3.8.2, and 3.8.3 in their entirety and add the following new Subparagraph 3.8.1: 3.8.1 Allowances shall not be made on any of the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 Add the following to the end of the paragraph: Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 Add the following: For projects with a contract sum greater than $1,000,000.00, the Contractor shall include with the schedule, for the Owner’s and Architect’s information, a network analysis to identify those tasks which are on the critical path, i.e. where any delay in the completion of these tasks will lengthen the project timescale, unless action

2013 SC 3

is taken. A revised schedule shall be submitted with each Application and Certificate for Payment. No payment will be made until this schedule is received. 3.10.3 Delete the word “…general…” Add the following: If the Work is not on schedule, as

determined by the Architect, and the Contractor fails to take action to bring the Work on schedule, then the Contractor shall be deemed in default under this Contract and the progress of the Work shall be deemed unsatisfactory. Such default may be considered grounds for termination by the Owner for cause in accordance with 14.2.

3.10.4 Add the following: Submittal by the contractor of a schedule or other documentation showing a completion date for his Work prior to the completion date stated in the contract shall not impose any obligation or responsibility on the Owner or Architect for the earlier completion date. 3.10.5 Add the following: In the event the Owner employs a commissioning consultant, the Contractor shall cooperate fully in the commissioning process and shall require all subcontractors and others under his control to cooperate. The purpose of such services shall be to ensure that all systems perform correctly and interactively according to the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add the following: This requirement is of the essence of the contract. The Architect shall determine the value of these documents and this amount shall not be approved for payment to the Contractor until all of the listed documents are delivered to the Architect in good order, completely marked with field changes and otherwise complete in all aspects.

ARTICLE 4

ARCHITECT 4.1 GENERAL Delete Subparagraph 4.1.1 and substitute the following: 4.1.1 The term Architect, when used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the prime Designer (Architect, Engineer or Landscape Architect), or his authorized representative, lawfully licensed to practice architecture, engineering or landscape architecture in the State of Louisiana, identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. 4.1.3 Delete the words: “as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and” 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 In the first sentence, delete the phrase: “the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment” and replace with the phrase “final payment is due, and with the Owner’s concurrence, from time to time during the one year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.”

2013 SC 4

4.2.2 In the first sentence, after the phrase: “become generally familiar with”; insert the following: “and to keep the Owner informed about.” In the first sentence, after the phrase “portion of the Work completed”, insert the following: “to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work,” 4.2.10 Add the following sentence to the end of Subsection 4.2.10: There will be no restriction on the Owner having a Representative. 4.2.11 Add the following sentence to the end of Subsection 4.2.11: If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.14 Insert the following sentence between the second and third sentences of Subsection 4.2.14: If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretation required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Section 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretation until 15 days after written request is made for them.

ARTICLE 5

SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Delete Subparagraph 5.2.1, and substitute the following: 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish at the Pre-Construction Conference, to the Owner and the Architect, in writing, the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. No Contractor payments shall be made until this information is received. Delete Subparagraph 5.2.2 and substitute the following: 5.2.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for selection and performance of all subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claims for additional time and/or an increase in the contract sum due to a problem with performance or non- performance of a subcontractor.

2013 SC 5

Delete Subparagraph 5.2.3 and 5.2.4 and add the following: 5.2.3 The contractor shall notify the Owner when a subcontractor is to be changed and substituted with another subcontractor. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Delete Subparagraphs 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3

ARTICLE 7

CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL Add the following paragraph: 7.1.4 As part of the pre-construction conference submittals, the contractor is to submit the following prior to the commencement of Work: Fixed job site overhead cost itemized with documentation to support daily rates. Bond Premium Rate with supporting information from the General Contractor’s carrier. Labor Burden by trade for both Subcontractors and General Contractor. Internal Rate Charges for all significant company owned equipment. Failure to submit this information as part of the pre-construction submittals shall prohibit the Contractor from claiming these items as costs on any change order issued on the project. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS Delete Subparagraph clause 7.2.1, and substitute the following paragraphs: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. Any reservation of rights, stipulation, or other modification made on the change order by the contractor will have no effect. 7.2.2 “Cost of the Work” for the purpose of Change Orders shall be costs required to be incurred in performance of the Work and paid by the Contractor and Subcontractors which shall consist of:

2013 SC 6

7.2.2.1 Wages paid direct labor personnel, delineating a labor burden markup for applicable payroll taxes, worker’s compensation insurance, unemployment compensation, and social security taxes. 7.2.2.2 Cost of all materials and supplies, including the identification of each item and its cost including taxes. 7.2.2.3 Identify each necessary piece of machinery and equipment and its individual cost including taxes. 7.2.2.4 Increases in insurance premiums for those forms of insurance required by Article

11 of these Supplementary Conditions and only for those forms. 7.2.2.5 Bond costs. Credit will not be required for Overhead and Profit. 7.2.3 Overhead and Profit - The Contractor and Subcontractor shall be due job-site and home office fixed overhead and profits on the Cost of the Work, but shall not exceed a total of 25% of the direct cost of any portion of Work: The credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of those items above, except credit will not be required for Overhead and Profit. Where a change results in both credits to the Owner and extras to the Contractor for related items, overhead and profit will only be computed on the net extra cost to the Contractor. 7.2.4 The cost to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be the sum of: Cost of the Work (as defined at 7.2.2) and Overhead and Profit (as defined at 7.2.4), and shall be computed as follows: 7.2.4.1 When all of the Work is General Contract Work; 15% markup on the Cost of the Work. 7.2.4.2 When the Work is all Subcontract Work; 15% markup on the Cost of the Work for Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit, plus 10% markup on the Cost of the Work, not including the Subcontractor’s Overhead and Profit markup, for General Contractor’s Overhead and Profit. 7.2.4.3 When the Work is a combination of General Contract Work and Subcontract Work; that portion of the direct cost that is General Contract Work shall be computed per 7.2.4.1 and that portion of the direct cost that is Subcontract Work shall be computed per 7.2.4.2. Premiums for the General Contractor’s bond may be included, but after the markup is added to the Cost of the Work. 7.2.4.4 Subcontract cost shall consist of the items in 7.2.2 above plus Overhead and Profit as defined in 7.2.4.

2013 SC 7

7.2.5 Before a Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Architect the following information concerning the Cost of the Work, not subject to waiver, within a reasonable time after being notified to prepare said Change Order: A detailed itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for the General Contractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor, material and equipment. An itemized list of labor, material and equipment costs for each Subcontractor’s and/or Sub-Subcontractor’s Work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor, material and equipment. 7.2.6 After a Change Order has been approved, no future requests for extensions of time or additional cost shall be considered for that Change Order. 7.2.7 The Contractor will be due extended fixed job-site overhead for time delays only when complete stoppage of Work occurs causing a contract completion extension, and the Contractor is unable to mitigate financial damages through replacement Work. The stoppage must be due to acts or omissions solely attributable to the Owner. In all cases the Contractor is to notify the Architect in writing as required by Article 15.1.2. Reasonable proof may be required by the architect that alternate Work could not be performed. Reasonable proof may be required by the Architect that the stoppage affected the Completion Date. 7.2.8 “Cost of the Work” whether General Contract cost or Subcontract cost shall not apply to the following: Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor’s personnel at the Contractor’s principal office and branch offices. Any part of the Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on the Contractor’s capital employed for the Work. Overhead and general expenses of any kind or the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included above in Cost of the Work. Cost of supervision not specifically required by the Change Order. 7.2.9 When applicable as provided by the Contract, the cost to Owner for Change Orders shall be determined by quantities and unit prices. The quantity of any item shall be as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Unit prices shall cover cost of Material, Labor, Equipment, Overhead and Profit. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.3 In the first sentence after following methods add: “, but not to exceed a specified amount.”

2013 SC 8

7.3.7 Delete the following from .1 of the list: “fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,” Delete the following from .4 of the list: “permit fees,” Delete the following from .5 of the list: “and field office personnel” 7.3.9 Delete Subparagraph 7.3.9 and substitute the following: Pending final determination of the total costs of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties’ agreement with part or all of such costs.

ARTICLE 8

TIME

8.1 DEFINITIONS Add the following: 8.1.5 The Contract Time shall not be changed by the submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date unless specifically authorized by change order. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Add to Subparagraph 8.2.1 the following: Completion of the Work must be within the Time for Completion stated in the Agreement, subject to such extensions as may be granted under Section 8.3. The Contractor agrees to commence Work not later than fourteen (14) days after the transmittal date of Written Notice to Proceed from the Owner and to substantially complete the project within the time stated in the Contract. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially complete in the time set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and the Contractor’s Surety shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum stated in the Contract Documents as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day (Saturdays, Sundays and holidays included) of delay until the Work is substantially complete. The Owner shall be entitled to the sum stated in the Contract Documents. Such Liquidated Damages shall be withheld by the Owner from the amounts due the Contractor for progress payments. Delete Subparagraph 8.2.2 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 In the first sentence after the words Owner pending delete the words: “mediation and arbitration” and add the word: “litigation” and delete the last word: “determine” and add the following: “recommend, subject to Owner’s approval of Change Order. If the claim

2013 SC 9

is not made within the limits of Article 15, all right for future claims for that month are waived.”

ARTICLE 9

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Delete Subparagraph 9.2 and substitute the following: 9.2 At the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and the Architect a Schedule of Values prepared as follows: 9.2.1 The attached Schedule of Values Format shall be used. If applicable, the cost of Work for each section listed under each division, shall be given. The cost for each section shall include Labor, Materials, Overhead and Profit. 9.2.2 The Total of all items shall equal the Total Contract Sum. This schedule, when approved by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor’s Applications for Payment and it may be used for determining the cost of the Work in deductive change orders, when a specific item of Work listed on the Schedule of Values is to be removed. Once the Schedule of Values is submitted at the Pre-Construction Conference, the schedule may not be modified without approval from the Owner and Architect. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Delete Subparagraph 9.3.1 and clause 9.3.1.1 and 9.3.1.2 and substitute the following: 9.3.1 Monthly, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an Application & Certificate for Payment on the AIA Document G702-1992, accompanied by AIA Document G703-1992, and supported by any additional data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may require. Application for Payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month for the value of labor and materials incorporated into the Work and of materials, suitably stored, at the site as of the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month, less normal retainage as follows, per R.S. 38:2248: 9.3.1.1 Projects with Contract price up to $500,000.00 – 10% of the Contract price. 9.3.1.2 Projects with Contract price of $500,000.00, or more – 5% of the Contract price. 9.3.1.3 No payment will be made until the revised schedule required by Section 3.10.1 is received. The normal retainage shall not be due the Contractor until after substantial completion and expiration of the forty-five day lien period and submission to the Architect of a clear lien certificate, consent of surety and invoice for retainage.

2013 SC 10

Delete Subparagraph 9.3.2 and substitute the following: 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. Payments for materials or equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, including applicable insurance. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION Subparagraph 9.5.1.7: Delete the word “repeated”. Delete Subparagraph 9.5.3 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS Delete Subparagraph 9.6.1 and substitute the following: 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment within twenty days except for projects funded fully or in part by a Federal reimbursement program. For such projects the Owner will make payment in a timely manner consistent with reimbursement. 9.6.2 Delete the phrase: “no later than seven days” from the first sentence. After the end of the second sentence, add the following: R.S. 9:2784 (A) and (C) require a Contractor or Subcontractor to make payment due to each Subcontractor and supplier within fourteen (14) consecutive days of the receipt of payment from the Owner. If not paid, a penalty in the amount of ½ of 1% per day is due, up to a maximum of 15% from the expiration date until paid. The contractor or subcontractor, whichever is applicable, is solely responsible for payment of a penalty. 9.6.4 Delete the first two sentences of Subparagraph 9.6.4 and add the following to the end of the Subparagraph: Pursuant to La. R.S. 38:2242, when the Owner receives any claim of nonpayment arising out of the Contract, the Owner shall deduct 125% of such claim from the Contract Sum. The Contractor, or any interested party, may deposit security, in accordance with La. R.S. 38:2242.2, guaranteeing payment of the claim with the recorder of mortgages of the parish where the Work has been done. When the Owner receives original proof of such guarantee from the recorder of mortgages, the claim deduction will be added back to the Contract Sum. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT Delete Subparagraph 9.7

2013 SC 11

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: Delete this section and substitute the following: 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The Architect shall determine if the project is substantially complete in accordance with this Subparagraph. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work is substantially complete. A prerequisite to the Work being considered as substantially complete is the Owner’s receipt of the executed Roofing Contractor’s and Roofing Manufacturer’s guarantees, where roofing Work is part of the Contract. Prior to inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall notify the Architect that the project is ready for inspection by the State Fire Marshal’s office. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before the Work can be considered as Substantially Complete, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Architect determines that the project is Substantially Complete, he shall prepare a punch list of exceptions and the dollar value related thereto. The monetary value assigned to this list will be the sum of the cost estimate for each particular item of Work the Architect develops based on the mobilization, labor, material and equipment costs of correcting the item and shall be retained from the monies owed the contractor, above and beyond the standard lien retainage. The cost of these items shall be prepared in the same format as the schedule of values. At the end of the 45 day lien period payment shall be approved for all punch list items completed up to that time. After that payment, none of the remaining funds shall be due the contractor until all punch list items are completed and are accepted by the Architect. If the dollar value of the punch list exceeds the amount of funds, less the retainage amount, in the remaining balance of the Contract, then the Project shall not be considered as substantially complete. If funds remaining are less than that required to complete the Work, the Contractor shall pay the difference. 9.8.5 When the preparation of the punch list is complete the Architect shall prepare a Recommendation of Acceptance incorporating the punch list and submit it to the Owner. Upon approval of the Recommendation of Acceptance, the Owner may issue a Notice of Acceptance of Building Contract which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Contractor will record the Notice of Acceptance with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the Work has been performed. If the Notice of Acceptance has not been recorded seven (7) days after issuance, the Owner may record the

2013 SC 12

Acceptance at the Contractor’s expense. All additive change orders must be processed before issuance of the Recommendation of Acceptance. The Owner will not be responsible for payment for any Work associated with change orders that is not incorporated into the contract at the time of the Recommendation of Acceptance. 9.8.6 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Acceptance of the Work unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner and Contractor, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work not covered by the punch list and insurance shall become the Owner’s responsibility on the Date of Substantial Completion. 9.8.7 If all punch list items have not been completed by the end of the forty-five (45) day lien period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within forty-five (45) days after notification, the Surety has not completed the punch list, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may, at his option, contract to have the balance of the Work completed and pay for such Work with the unpaid funds remaining in the Contract sum. Finding the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason for disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future state contracts. If the surety fails to complete the punch list within the stipulated time period, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the surety. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 Delete paragraph and substitute the following: Partial Occupancy is that stage in the progress of the Work when a designated portion of the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the designated portion of the Work for its intended use. The Owner may occupy or use any substantially completed portion of the Work so designated by separate agreement with the Contractor and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such occupancy or use may commence provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers the designated portion substantially complete the Contract shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonable withheld. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 After the first sentence, add the following: If the Architect does not find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Architect shall make one additional inspection; if the Work is still not acceptable, the Architect, and each of the Architect’s principal consultants, shall be paid $175.00/hour for their time at the project site, for each additional inspection, to be withheld from the

2013 SC 13

unpaid funds remaining in the Contract sum. The payment shall be made by the Owner and deducted from the construction contract funds. 9.10.4 Replace with the following: The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner for the following: 9.10.4.1 Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; 9.10.4.2 Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents irrespective of when such failure is discovered; or 9.10.4.3 Terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 10

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.2 In the first sentence, between the words: “bearing on and safety”, add the words: “the health and,” 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 In the first sentence after (PCB) add: “or lead” 10.3.2 After the first sentence, delete all remaining sentences. Add at the end: “The Contract time shall be extended appropriately.” 10.4 EMERGENCIES Delete Subparagraph 10.4 and substitute the following: 10.4 In an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Architect immediately of the emergency, simultaneously acting at his discretion to prevent damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency Work shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11

INSURANCE AND BONDS

Delete all of Paragraphs 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3 and substitute the following:

2013 SC 14

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR

NEW CONSTRUCTION, ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS 11.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain without interruption for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the Work hereunder by the Contractor, its agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. The duration of the contract shall be from the inception of the contract until the date of final payment. 11.2 MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE 11.2.1 Worker’s Compensation Worker’s Compensation insurance shall be in compliance with the Worker’s Compensation law of the State of Louisiana. Employers Liability is included with a minimum limit of $500,000 per accident/per disease/per employee. If Work is to be performed over water and involves maritime exposure, applicable LHWCA, Jones Act or other maritime law coverage shall be included and the Employers Liability limit increased to a minimum of $1,000,000. A.M. Best’s insurance company rating requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only. 11.2.2 Commercial General Liability Commercial General Liability insurance, including Personal and Advertising Injury Liability and Products and Completed Operations Liability, shall have a minimum limit per occurrence based on the project value. The Insurance Services Office (ISO) Commercial General Liability occurrence coverage form CG 00 01 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. Claims-made form is unacceptable. The aggregate loss limit must apply to each project. ISO form CG 25 03 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, shall also be submitted. COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (CSL) PER OCCURRENCE Projects over Type of Projects $1,000,000 up to Projects over Construction up to $1,000,000 _$10,000,000__ $10,000,000 New Buildings: Each Occurrence Minimum Limit $1,000,000 $2,000,000 $4,000,000 Per Project Aggregate $2,000,000 $4,000,000 $8,000,000

Each Occurrence Minimum Limit $1,000,000** $2,000,000** $4,000,000**

2013 SC 15

Per Project Aggregate 2 times per 2 times per 2 times per occur limit** occur limit** occur limit** **While the minimum Combined Single Limit of $500,000 is required for any renovation, the limit is calculated by taking 10% of the building value and rounding it to the nearest $1,000,000 to get the insurance limit. Example: Renovation on a $33,000,000 building would have a calculated $3,000,000 combined single limit of coverage (33,000,000 times .10 = 3,300,000 and then rounding down to $3,000,000). If the calculated limit is less than the minimum limit listed in the above chart, then the amount needed is the minimum listed in the chart. Maximum per occurrence limit required is $10,000,000 regardless of building value. The per project aggregate limit is then calculated as twice the per occurrence limit. 11.2.3 Automobile Liability Automobile Liability Insurance shall have a minimum combined single limit per occurrence of $500,000. ISO form number CA 00 01 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used in the policy. This insurance shall include third- party bodily injury and property damage liability for owned, hired and non-owned automobiles. 11.2.4 Excess Umbrella Excess Umbrella Insurance may be used to meet the minimum requirements for General Liability and Automobile Liability only. 11.2.5 Builder’s Risk Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be in an amount equal to the greater of the fully- completed project value or the amount of the construction contract including any amendments and shall be upon the entire Work included in the contract. The policy shall provide coverage equivalent to the ISO form number CP 10 20, Broad Form Causes of Loss (extended, if necessary, to include the perils of wind, earthquake, collapse, vandalism/malicious mischief, and theft, including theft of materials whether or not attached to any structure). The policy must include architects’ and engineers’ fees necessary to provide plans, specifications and supervision of Work for the repair and/or replacement of property damage caused by a covered peril, not to exceed 10% of the cost of the repair and/or replacement. 11.2.6 Pollution Liability (required when asbestos or other hazardous material abatement is included in the contract) Pollution Liability insurance, including gradual release as well as sudden and accidental, shall have a minimum limit of not less than $1,000,000 per claim. A claims-made form will be acceptable. A policy period inception date of no later than the first day of anticipated Work under this contract and an expiration date of no earlier than 30 days after anticipated completion of all Work under the contract shall be provided. There shall be an extended reporting period of at least 24 months, with full reinstatement of

2013 SC 16

limits, from the expiration date of the policy. The policy shall not be cancelled for any reason, except non-payment of premium. 11.2.7 Deductibles and Self-Insured Retentions Any deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared to and accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deductibles and self-insured retentions. 11.3 OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 11.3.1 The policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: 11.3.1.1 Worker’s Compensation and Employers Liability Coverage 11.3.1.1.1 The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers for losses arising from Work performed by the Contractor for the Owner. 11.3.1.2 General Liability Coverage 11.3.1.2.1 The Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers are to be added as additional insureds as respects liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor, premises owned, occupied or used by the Contractor. ISO Form CG 20 10 (current form approved for use in Louisiana), or equivalent, is to be used. 11.3.1.2.2 The Contractor’s insurance shall be primary as respects the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner shall be excess and non-contributory of the Contractor’s insurance. 11.3.1.2.3 The Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the policy limits. 11.3.1.3 Builder’s Risk The policy must include an endorsement providing the following:

In the event of a disagreement regarding a loss covered by this policy which may also be covered by Parish of Ascension, Contractor and its

2013 SC 17

insurer agree to follow the following procedure to establish coverage and/or the amount of loss:

Any party to a loss may make written demand for an appraisal of the matter in disagreement. Within 20 days of receipt of written demand, the Contractor’s insurer and Parish of Ascension or its commercial insurance company shall each select a competent and impartial appraiser and notify the other of the appraiser selected. The two appraisers will select a competent and impartial umpire. The appraisers will then identify the policy or policies under which the loss is insured and, if necessary, state separately the value of the property and the amount of the loss that must be borne by each policy. If the two appraisers fail to agree, they shall submit their differences to the umpire. A written decision by any two shall determine the policy or policies and the amount of the loss. Each insurance company agrees that the decision of the appraisers and the umpire if involved will be binding and final and that neither party will resort to litigation. Each of the two parties shall pay its chosen appraiser and bear the cost of the umpire equally.

11.3.1.4 All Coverages 11.3.1.4.1 Coverage shall not be canceled, suspended, or voided by either party (the Contractor or the insurer) or reduced in coverage or in limits except after 30 days written notice has been given to the Owner. Ten-day written notice of cancellation is acceptable for non-payment of premium. Notifications shall comply with the standard cancellation provisions in the Contractor’s policy. 11.3.1.4.2 Neither the acceptance of the completed Work nor the payment thereof shall release the Contractor from the obligations of the insurance requirements or indemnification agreement. 11.3.1.4.3 The insurance companies issuing the policies shall have no recourse against the Owner for payment of premiums or for assessments under any form of the policies. 11.3.1.4.4 Any failure of the Contractor to comply with reporting provisions of the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. 11.3.2 ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS All required insurance shall be provided by a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located. Insurance shall be placed with insurers with an A.M. Best’s rating of A-:VI or higher. This rating requirement may be waived for Worker’s compensation coverage only.

2013 SC 18

If at any time an insurer issuing any such policy does not meet the minimum A.M. Best rating, the Contractor shall obtain a policy with an insurer that meets the A.M. Best rating and shall submit another certificate of insurance as required in the contract. 11.3.3 VERIFICATION OF COVERAGE Contractor shall furnish the Owner with Certificates of Insurance reflecting proof of required coverage. The Certificates for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The Certificates are to be received and approved by the Owner before Work commences and upon any contract renewal thereafter. The Certificate Holder must be listed as follows: Name of Owner: Parish of Ascension Owner Address: 208 Railroad Ave. City, State, Zip: Gonzales, LA 70810 Attn: Project # ENG-11-043 In addition to the Certificates, Contractor shall submit the declarations page and the cancellation provision endorsement for each insurance policy. The Owner reserves the right to request complete certified copies of all required insurance policies at any time. Upon failure of the Contractor to furnish, deliver and maintain such insurance as above provided, this contract, at the election of the Owner, may be suspended, discontinued or terminated. Failure of the Contractor to purchase and/or maintain any required insurance shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or indemnification under the contract. If the Contractor does not meet the insurance requirements at policy renewal, at the option of the Owner, payment to the Contractor may be withheld until the requirements have been met, OR the Owner may pay the renewal premium and withhold such payment from any monies due the Contractor, OR the contract may be suspended or terminated for cause. 11.3.4 SUBCONTRACTORS Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies OR shall be responsible for verifying and maintaining the certificates provided by each subcontractor. Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. The Owner reserves the right to request copies of subcontractor’s certificates at any time. If Contractor does not verify subcontractors’ insurance as described above, Owner has the right to withhold payments to the Contractor until the requirements have been met. 11.3.5 WORKER’S COMPENSATION INDEMNITY In the event Contractor is not required to provide or elects not to provide Worker’s compensation coverage, the parties hereby agree the Contractor, its Owners, agents and employees will have no cause of action against, and will not assert a claim against, Parish of Ascension, its departments, agencies, agents and employees as an employer, whether pursuant to the Louisiana Worker’s Compensation Act or otherwise, under any circumstance. The parties also hereby agree that the Parish of Ascension, its departments,

2013 SC 19

agencies, agents and employees shall in no circumstance be, or considered as, the employer or statutory employer of Contractor, its Owners, agents and employees. The parties further agree that Contractor is a wholly independent Contractor and is exclusively responsible for its employees, Owners, and agents. Contractor hereby agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and hold the Parish of Ascension, its departments, agencies, agents and employees harmless from any such assertion or claim that may arise from the performance of this contract. 11.3.6 INDEMNIFICATION/HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify, save, and hold harmless, the Parish of Ascension, all Departments, Agencies, Boards and Commissions, its officers, agents, servants, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, damages, expenses and liability arising out of injury or death to any person or the damage, loss or destruction of any property which may occur, or in any way grow out of, any act or omission of Contractor, its agents, servants and employees, or any and all costs, expenses and/or attorney fees incurred by Contractor as a result of any claims, demands, suits or causes of action, except those claims, demands, suits or causes of action arising out of the negligence of the Parish of Ascension, all Departments, Agencies, Boards, Commissions, its officers, agents, servants, employees and volunteers.

Contractor agrees to investigate, handle, respond to, provide defense for and defend any such claims, demands, suits or causes of action at its sole expense and agrees to bear all other costs and expenses related thereto, even if the claims, demands, suits, or causes of action are groundless, false or fraudulent. 11.4 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Add the following Subparagraph 11.4.3: 11.4.3 RECORDATION OF CONTRACT AND BOND [38:2241A(2)] The Owner shall record within thirty (30) days the Contract Between Owner and Contractor and Performance and Payment Bond with the Clerk of Court in the Parish in which the Work is to be performed.

ARTICLE 12

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION At the end of the paragraph, add the following sentences: “If the Contractor fails to correct Work identified as defective within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Designer, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the nonconforming Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have nonconforming Work corrected and hold the Surety and Contractor responsible for the cost, including architectural fees and other indirect costs. If the Surety fails to correct the Work within

2013 SC 20

the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may elect not to accept bonds submitted in the future by the Surety. Finding the Contractor in default shall constitute a reason for disqualification of the Contractor from bidding on future state contracts. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 At the end of the paragraph delete the last sentence and add the following sentences: If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the nonconforming Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have the nonconforming Work corrected and hold the Surety responsible for the cost including architects fees and other indirect costs. Corrections by the Owner shall be in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Surety fails to correct the nonconforming Work within the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the Surety. 12.2.2.1 At the end of the paragraph delete the last sentence and add the following sentences: If the Contractor fails to correct Work covered by warranties within a thirty (30) day period, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may hold the Contractor in default. If the Owner finds the Contractor is in default, the Surety shall be notified. If within thirty (30) days after notification, the Surety has not corrected the warranty Work, through no fault of the Architect or Owner, the Owner may contract to have the warranty Work corrected and hold the Surety responsible for the cost including architects fees and other indirect costs. Corrections by the Owner shall be in accordance with Section 2.4. If the Surety fails to correct the warranty Work within the stipulated time period and fails to meet its obligation to pay the costs, the Owner may not accept bonds submitted, in the future, by the Surety.

ARTICLE 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW Delete all after the word “located”. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 In the second sentence, delete “Except as … 13.2.2” Delete paragraph 13.2.2 13.4 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS In Subparagraph 13.5.1, delete the second sentence and substitute the following:

2013 SC 21

The Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with the Testing Laboratory provided by the Owner, and the Owner shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.1 13.5 INTEREST Delete Paragraph 13.6 13.6 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS Delete Paragraph 13.7 (See L.R.S. 38:2189).

ARTICLE 14

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR Delete clause 14.1.1.4 In Subparagraph 14.1.3, after the word “profit” add the following: “for Work completed prior to stoppage”. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Add the following clause: 14.2.1.5 Failure to complete the punch list within the lien period as provided in 9.8.7. 14.2.3 Add the following sentence: Termination by the Owner shall not suspend assessment of liquidated damages against the Surety. 14.2.5 Add the following Subparagraph: If an agreed sum of liquidated damages has been established, termination by the Owner under this Article will not relieve the Contractor and/or surety of his obligations under the liquidated damages provisions and the Contractor and/or surety shall be liable to the Owner for per diem liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 15

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

2013 SC 22

15.1 CLAIMS In the first sentence of Subparagraph 15.1.1, after the word “money”, add the phrase: “extension of time,” 15.1.2 Add the following to the end of the paragraph: A Reservation of Rights and similar stipulations shall not be recognized under this contract as having any effect. A party must make a claim as defined herein within the time limits provided. 15.1.3 In the second sentence of the Subparagraph, delete “the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker” and replace with: “his/her decision”. Delete Paragraph 15.1.5.2 and substitute the following: If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, the Contractor shall document that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. An increase in the contract time due to weather shall not be cause for an increase in the contract sum. At the end of each month, the Contractor shall make one Claim for any adverse weather days occurring within the month. The Claim must be accompanied by sufficient documentation evidencing the adverse days and the impact on construction. Failure to make such Claim within twenty-one (21) days from the last day of the month shall prohibit any future claims for adverse days for that month. 15.1.5.3 Add the following Subparagraph: The following are considered reasonably anticipated days of adverse weather on a monthly basis: January 11 days July 6 days February 10 days August 5 days March 8 days September 4 days April 7 days October 3 days May 5 days November 5 days June 6 days December 8 days The Contractor shall ask for total adverse weather days. The Contractor’s request shall be considered only for days over the allowable number of days stated above. Note: Contract is on a calendar day basis. 15.2 INITIAL DECISION 15.2.1 In the second sentence, delete the word “will” and replace with: “shall always”. In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.” In the third sentence, delete the word “mediation” and replace with: “litigation”.

2013 SC 23

In the third sentence, delete: “unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered.” 15.2.5 In the middle of the first sentence, delete all after the phrase: “rejecting the Claim”. In the second sentence, delete the phrase: “and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.” In the third sentence, delete all after: “binding on the parties” and add the following: “except that the Owner may reject the solution or suggest a compromise or both.” 15.2.6 Delete Paragraph. Delete Subparagraph 15.2.6.1 15.3 MEDIATION Delete Article 15.3 15.4 ARBITRATION Delete Article 15.4

Ascension Maintenance Building J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners Ascension Parish, Louisiana domain design architecture

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 -

1.1 SUMMARY

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Use of premises. 3. Specification formats and conventions.

B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the Work.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Ascension Maintenance Building

1. Project Location: Donaldsonville, LA

B. Owner: Ascension Parish

C. Engineer: J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners

D. The Work consists of the following: A new metal building with offices, mezzanine and shop area for the DPW West Maintenance Department.

E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.4 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Request]

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 25th

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.



2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Project meetings. 3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.

C. See Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.



2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Work restrictions. m. Owner's occupancy requirements. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Construction waste management and recycling. p. Parking availability. q. Equipment deliveries and priorities. r. Security. s. Progress cleaning. t. Working hours.



3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.



1.5 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs:

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."



a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 3 days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.



2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for The Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule two days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.



1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

D. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.



2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approved or approved as noted taken by Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring. f. Shop work manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 x 36 inches.



3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."



B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

M. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

N. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."



P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.



H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.



F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.



3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

REFERENCES

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.



1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration



HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards



UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards





PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: substitution requests shall only be considered during the bid process.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:



a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

b. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

c. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. f. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

g. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.



2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather

tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.5 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.



5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

EXECUTION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.



B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.



C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.



1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

C. See Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

D. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

E. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.



12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.



1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.



d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Emergency manuals. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes

systems and equipment.

B. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.



D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures.

B. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

C. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.



B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Performance curves. 6. Engineering data and tests.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.



2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions that detail essential maintenance procedures:

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.



D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Face brick.

B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.

C. See Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints for metal flashing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units and colored mortars.

C. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards.

1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm)] long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products

specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) or greater.

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.

3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced."

4. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) long.

C. Color/ Manufacturer/ Distributor: Charleston; Columbus Brick Company; Economy Brick or equal as selected by Architect from Tri-State Brick or Cherokee Brick in regards to color, texture

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Type S

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 - Type S.

C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 – Type S.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.



F. Water: Potable.

2.4 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors (two-piece only)

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section.

a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, and slotted holes for inserting wire tie.

b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections from 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.



3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use[ one of] the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth.

a. Available Products:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) AFCO Products Inc.; Copper Fabric. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 7) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep.

b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar.

c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

2. Available Products:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.



2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior masonry to portland cement and lime. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.



C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Lay structural-clay tile as follows:

1. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.



2. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be squeezed out as units are placed in position.

3. Maintain joint thicknesses indicated except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6- to 10-mm-) thick joints.

4. Where epoxy-mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other

than

3.4 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners.

2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.

4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

3.5 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

B. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:



1. Use open head joints to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with

loose-fill insulation.

C. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

3.6 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm) with a steel-trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.7 CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes

20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's

written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to

type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 2. Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above,

and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing.

2. Wall sheathing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing[.][:]

1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."



1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 (230) 2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) 2. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) 3. Depth of Stud: As indicated on drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).



B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.

C. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. Depth as shown on drawings.

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 1 1/2 inch (22.2 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.

2.7 WALL SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.

2. Wall Panel Fasteners: Provide fasteners with corrosion protective coating having a salt spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.

3. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers.

4. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers.



2.8 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing members

is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

4. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.



B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard

with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:



1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

K. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.

L. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

M. GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION 1. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. b. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements. c. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar

materials.

N. Wood structural panel installation: 1. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, “APA

Design / Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial.: a) Comply with “Code Plus” installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph

above. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below

a) Wall and Roof Sheathing: • Nail to wood framing • Screw to cold-formed metal framing

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm).

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 54 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched

studs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated

and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.



E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

METAL FABRICATIONS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal bollards. 2. Loose steel lintels.

B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type [304] [316L]. 3. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is

indicated or required by structural loads.

C. Nonferrous Metals:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6. 2. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6. 3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

D. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended.

3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

B. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanize

C. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate.



2.6 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Steel and Iron Finishes:

1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable.

2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.

1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for

consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.

1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1

SECTION 055100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

METAL STAIRS

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with abrasive coating finished formed metal treads. 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs and to walls adjacent to metal stairs.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),

whichever is less.

B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).

b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For metal stairs.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

F. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170).

H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205).

I. Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated).



J. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.


A. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturers:

1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).

B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,[ railings,] clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges,

unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members.

1. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive finish.

E. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.



F. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Rails: 1 1/2 inches (38.1 mm) diameter x 13 gage (2.3mm) minimum round steel tube,

continuous multi-strand type, equally spaced with not more than 3 15/16 inches (100mm) clearance between strands and with a minimum extension per code at top and bottom risers. Wrap rail continuously past space between flights to form guardrail as required by building code. Terminate rail ends with radiused returns, newel [posts or safety terminations approved by local code. Provide not less than 1 1/2 inches (38.1 mm) clearing between rail and wall.

2. Rail Posts: 1 /12 inches (38.1mm) square x 11 gage (3mm) tubing. Rail posts to fasten to side of plate stringers per manufacturer’s shop drawings. Manufacturer to pre-weld erection aid to rail post for proper height to aid stair erector. Erection aid (setting block) to be removed and weld-ground smooth after installation.

3. Fabrication: a) Use preformed or prefabricated bends. b) Butt weld tee and cross intersections in turbing. Cope and weld intersections in

pipe. Miter elbows. c) Mechanically fasten internal sleeves and fittings d) Provide minimum 12 gage (2.7 mm) welded steel plate closures or hemispherical

closure fittings on all exposed rail ends. 4. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.



D. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.

E. Install precast treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.

F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.

G. Adjusting and Cleaning:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops.

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

B. Samples:

1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

2. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Thermoset decorative panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following:



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Products:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

B. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011 provided by Owner, installed by contractor.

D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;

zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or

24 inches (600 mm) wide. 4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide.

E. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.

F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Economy. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove

splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 3. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and

in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,

except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation

require field assembly.

C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame 2. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. d. Edges: Grade HGS.

4. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

5. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 6. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 7. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: See Drawings.

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: RE: Drawings. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.



C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim.

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PLASTIC PANELING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. c. Nudo Products, Inc.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.075 inch (1.9 mm). 3. Surface Finish: as indicated on drawings 4. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners,[ outside corners,] and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1. Color: Match panels.


PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2

B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.



BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

BUILDING INSULATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation.

• Metal Building insulation is specified under Section 133419


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire-resistance characteristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:





2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated in the following stud wall thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated to fill cavity completely:

1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.9 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).



4. 10 inches (254 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (5.2 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units



to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Install 3-inch- (76-mm-) thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches (1219 mm) on either side of partition.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.



D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.



VAPOR PERMEABLE, SELF-ADHERED SHEET MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072714 - 1

SECTION 072714 - SELF-ADHERED SHEET MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS,

VAPOR PERMEABLE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY


1. Materials and installation methods for self-adhered vapor permeable air barrier mem-

brane system located in the non-accessible part of the wall. 2. Materials and installation methods to bridge and seal air leakage pathways in roof and

foundation junctions, window and door openings, control and expansion joints, maso-nry ties, piping and other penetrations through the wall assembly.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied

to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.


A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air

barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommo-dating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construc-tion material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. The building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air barrier to

control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. An air barrier shall also be pro-vided for interior partitions between conditioned space and space designed to maintain temperature or humidity levels which differ from those in the conditioned space by more than 50% of the difference between the conditioned space and design ambient conditions. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics:

1. It must be continuous, with all joints made airtight. 2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. under a pressure diffe-

rential of 0.3 in. water. (1.57 psf) (equal to 0.02L/sq. m @ 75 Pa), when tested in ac-cordance with ASTM E2178.

3. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load.

4. It shall be durable or maintainable. 5. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier ma-

terial of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to ther-mal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: a. Foundation and walls.



b. Walls and windows or doors. c. Different wall systems. d. Wall and roof. e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space. f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.

6. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made

airtight.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and

treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate

joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, termina-tions, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups.

C. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval:

1. Self-Adhered Air Barrier Membrane 2. Self-Adhered Transition Membrane 3. Self-Adhered Through Wall Flashing

D. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory

materials with project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer.

E. Qualification Data: For Applicator. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a quali-

fied testing agency, for air barriers, submit certified test report showing compliance with re-quirements specified for ASTM E2178.

G. Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions stated in Article

1.10.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Air barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a

minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of waterproofing and air bar-riers. Manufacturers proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier material and through wall flashing through

one source from a single manufacturer. Should project require a vapor permeable and a vapor impermeable air barrier on same project, obtain vapor-permeable and vapor imper-meable air barrier and through wall flashing from one source from a single manufacturer. See specification Section 072713 for self-adhered sheet membrane air barrier - vapor im-permeable.



C. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in ma-terial, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in ap-plications with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, provide air barrier work for exterior

wall assembly mockups, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier mem-brane. 1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of

air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed. 2. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mock-

ups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance

with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Pro-tect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction opera-tions. Remove damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applica-ble regulations.

B. Do not double-stack pallets of fluid applied components on the job site. Provide cover on

top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. C. Protect fluid-applied components from freezing and extreme heat. D. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environ-mental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.



1.10 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

self-adhered air barrier membrane materials that fail within specified warranty period when installed and used in strict conformance with written manufacturer's instructions. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to maintain air permeance rating not to exceed .004 cfm/sq. ft (0.02 L/s/sq. m.) when tested per ASTM E2178, within specified warranty period.

b. Failure to maintain a vapor permeance rating greater than 15 perms when tested in accordance with ATM E96, Method B.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANE (Basis-of-Design) Grace Construction Products

• Approved Manufacturers: Carlisle and W. R. Windows A. SELF-ADHERED AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE: Perm-A-Barrier VPS manufactured by

Grace Construction Products, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA; a self-adhered membrane consisting of a breathable carrier film with a specially designed adhesive, which permits the transfusion of water vapor and provides superior protection against the damag-ing effects of air and water ingress on building structures, Product shall have the following minimum physical properties:

1. Air Permeance, ASTM E2178: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. under a pressure diffe-

rential of 0.3 in. water. (1.57 psf) (equal to 0.02L/sq. m @ 75 Pa) 2. Assembly Air Permeance, ASTM E2357: Not to exceed 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. under a pres-

sure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf) (equal to 0.2 L/sq.m @ 75 Pa) 3. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96: Not less than 15 perms 4. Water Resistance, AATCC-127: No less than 5 hrs at 55 cm/21 inch 5. Breaking Force, ASTM D5034: 55 lbf MD, and 44 lbf CD 6. Pull Adhesion, ASTM D4541: min. 15 psi to primed glass faced gypsum sheathing,

min. 12 psi to primed CMU 7. Peel Adhesion, ASTM D903: min. 5 pli to primed glass faced gypsum sheathing, min.

4 pli to Perm-A-Barrier® VPS, min. 2.5 pli to primed CMU 8. UV Exposure Limit: Not more than 150 calendar days 9. Water Penetration Resistance Around Nails, ASTM D1970 Modified: Pass

B. TRANSITION MEMBRANE: Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Product; a 0.9 mm (36 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (4 mil) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable sili-cone-coated release paper until installed, conforming to the following:

1. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 2. Air Permeance at 75Pa (0.3 in. water) pressure difference: 0.0006 L/(s.m2) (0.00012

cfm/ft2) max. 3. Puncture Resistance, ASTM E154: 178 N (40 lbs.) min. 4. Lap Adhesion at -4ºC (25ºF), ASTM D1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 5. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -43ºC (-45ºF) 6. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 2.7 MPa (400 psi) 7. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt, ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200%.



C. FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE THROUGH-WALL FLASHING: Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing manu-factured by Grace Construction Products; a 0.8 mm (32 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized as-phalt integrally bonded to 0.2 mm (8 mil) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposa-ble silicone-coated release paper until installed, conforming to the following:

1. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 2. Water Absorption, ASTM D570: max. 0.1% by weight 3. Puncture Resistance, ASTM E154: 356 N (80 lbs.) min. 4. Tear Resistance

a. Initiation, ASTM D1004: min. 58 N (13.0 lbs.) M.D. b. Propagation, ASTM D1938: min. 40 N (9.0 lbs.) M.D.

5. Lap Adhesion at -4ºC (25ºF), ASTM D1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 6. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -43ºC (-45ºF) 7. Tensile Strength, ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 5.5 MPa (800 psi) 8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt, ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200%

2.02 PRIMERS

A. Primer for Primary Self-adhered air barrier membrane: Perm-A-Barrier Primer Plus manufactured by Grace Construction Products; a water-based primer which imparts an aggressive, high tack finish on the treated substrate. Product shall have the following minimum physical properties:

1. Color: Milky White (wet), Clear (dry) 2. Weight: 8.25 lbs./gal. 3. Solids Content (by wt.): 53-57% 4. Solvent Type: Water 3. VOC Content: Not to excess 1 g/L 4. Application Temperature: 4°C (40°F) and above

B. Wall Primer for Self-adhered transition membrane and Self-adhered flexible membrane wall

flashing: Perm-A- Barrier WB Primer manufactured by Grace Construction Products; a wa-ter-based primer which imparts an aggressive, high tack finish on the treated substrate. Product Shall have the following minimum physical properties:

1. Flash Point: No flash to boiling point 2. Solvent Type: Water 3. VOC Content: Not to exceed 10 g/L 4. Application Temperature: -4°C (25°F) and above 5. Freezing point (as packaged): -7°C (21°F)

2.03 PENETRATIONS & TERMINATION SEALANT

A. Liquid Membrane for Details and Terminations: Bituthene Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products; a two-part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered membranes and tapes. 10 g/L max. VOC content.

B. Substrate Patching Membrane: Bituthene Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Con-

struction Products; a two- part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered membranes and tapes. 10 g/L max. VOC content.

C. Joint Sealant: Refer to sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify

engineer or architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the Work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrates.

B. C. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other

contaminants detrimental to the adhesion of the membranes. Fill voids, gaps and spalled areas in substrate to provide an even plane. Strike masonry joints full-flush.

D. E. Curing compounds or release agents used in concrete construction must be resin based

without oil, wax or pigments. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces

shall be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the air barrier assembly.

B. Exterior sheathing panels: Ensure that the boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners

and edges fastened with appropriate screws in accordance with exterior sheathing manu-facturers written instructions.

C. Masonry Substrates: Apply air and vapor barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth

trowel-cut mortar joints, struck full and flush. Fill all voids and holes, particularly in the mor-tar joints, with a lean mortar mix, non-shrinking grout or parge coat.

D. Related Materials: Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by manu-

facturer. E. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

F. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

G. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,

holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. H. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. I. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or Bituthene Liquid Membrane at sharp cor-

ners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. J. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to

another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.03 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for recommendations on installation



B. Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier

manufacturer's written instructions. C. Application of Self-Adhered Air Barrier Membrane

1. Install air barrier to dry surfaces at air and surface temperatures of 4°C (40°F) and above in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at locations indicated on Construction Documents.

2. Prime substrate to receive air barrier membrane as required per manufacturers written instructions.

3. Precut pieces of air barrier into easily handled lengths. 4. Remove release linear and position membrane carefully before placing against the sur-

face. 5. Begin installation at the base of the wall placing top edge of membrane immediately be-

low any masonry reinforcement or ties protruding from substrate. 6. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place. Roll mem-

brane with extension-handled countertop roller immediately after placement. 7. Overlap adjacent pieces 50 mm (2 in.) and roll seams. 8. Subsequent sheets of membrane applied above shall be positioned immediately below

masonry reinforcement or ties. Bottom edge shall be slit to fit around reinforcing wires or ties, and membrane shall overlap the membrane sheet below by 50 mm (2 in.). Roll firmly into place.

9. Seal around masonry reinforcing or ties and all penetrations with penetration & termina-tion sealant.

10. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with roof installer to ensure continuity of mem-brane with roof air barrier.

11. At end of each working day seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination sea-lant.

12. Do not expose air barrier membrane to sunlight for more than 150 days prior to enclo-sure.

13. Inspect installation prior to enclosing and repair punctures, damaged areas and inade-quately lapped seams with a patch of the membrane sized to extend 150 mm (6 in.) in all directions from the perimeter of the affected area.

3.04 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufac-

turer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a conti-nuous air barrier. Install all transition membrane only after application of air barrier.

B. Apply primer to substrates to receive transition membrane at required rate and allow to dry.

Limit priming to areas that will be covered by transition tape in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing not covered with air membrane material

with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.



C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory mate-rials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge transition membrane to substrate with termina-

tion sealant. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within sealant manufacturer's rec-

ommended application temperature ranges. Consult sealant manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,

storefronts, and doors. Apply transition membrane so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over both substrates. 1. Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and

miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in transition membrane. Slit and flat-

ten fish-mouths and blisters. Patch with transition membrane extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and in-

spections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance

with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope

with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions,

and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been main-

tained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in transition membrane have complied with minimum requirements and have

been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fish-mouths.

8. Termination sealant has been applied on cut edges. 9. Transition membrane has been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with re-

quirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, in-tegrity, and continuity of seal.

13. All penetrations have been sealed.



C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage

according to ASTM E1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction

period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by

manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 150 days. C. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed

work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

D. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

JOINT SEALANTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

B. See Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.

D. Product test reports.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.



C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.



C. Single-Component Pourable Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-1:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. b. Pecora Corporation; 300 Pavement Sealant (Self Leveling). c. Dow Corning Corporation; SL Parking Structure Sealant.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT and T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: O, as applicable to joint substrates indicated.

D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-2:

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O. 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per

ASTM C 1248.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints AS-1: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) O (open-cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:



C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant.

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in stucco.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-3: Exterior butt joints between metal panels.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range..

D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above.


E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-5: Exterior perimeter joints between stucco and frames of doors windows and louvers.


F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-6: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.


G. Joint-Sealant Application JS-7: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.


H. Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral -curing silicone sealant ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: White.

I. Joint-Sealant Application JS-9 Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances.

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant AS-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure NFPA 252.

B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 5. Firedoor Corporation. 6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Habersham Metal Products Company. 8. Kewanee Corporation (The). 9. Mesker Door Inc. 10. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 11. Security Metal Products Corp. 12. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

G. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end

closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), [Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down or face welded unless otherwise indicated.



3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down or face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 7. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet. 8. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as door face sheet.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as frames.

D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.



2.8 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.



4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 electrical Sections.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type

of installation indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.



3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between

frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6

mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner.



3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.


A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Buell Door Company Inc. 3. Eggers Industries. 4. Ipik Door Company. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 6. Weyerhauser Company.



2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

B. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Cherry. 3. Cut: Quarter sliced. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 7. Core: Glued wood stave. 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers:

1. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-M12C22A31.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.



2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish system. 3. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.



D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:

1. Service doors. 2. Insulated service doors.

B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

C. See Division 11 Section "Parking Control Equipment" for parking control equipment interlocked to overhead coiling doors.

D. See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.


A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward.

2. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to ASTM E 1886.

a. Level of Protection: Unprotected. b. Wind Zone One: 110 mph (176 km/h), pressure test to 1/2 and 1-1/2 x design

pressure (positive and negative).

B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.



B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Atlas Door; Div. of Clopay Building Products Company, Inc. 2. Cornell Iron Works Inc. 3. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 4. Overhead Door Corp. 5. Raynor.

2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Interlocking slats in a continuous length for width of door of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door.

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS) sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.

2. Slat type: Flat profile. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type

thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.

B. Endlocks and Windlocks: Malleable-iron casings, secured to curtain slats to comply with wind load.

C. Bottom Bar: 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick to suit type of curtain slats.

1. Astragal: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; as a cushion bumper for interior door.

D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.



E. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Steel Door Hoods: Minimum 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet that matches slat steel.

2. Shape: Round. 3. Exterior-Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant-joint bead profile for applying joint

sealant.

F. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Welded assemblies:

1. Steel: Minimum 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet that matches door steel.

2. Stainless-Steel: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304.

G. Integral Sills: Integral part of frame assembly; fabricate of same sheet metal.

H. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.

1. Jamb Seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.

I. Push/Pull Handles: Galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door.

1. Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.

J. Slide Bolt: Engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

K. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

L. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

1. Mounting Brackets: Cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.

M. Manual Door Operator: Push-up (lift- or pull-up) operation not exceeding 25 lbf (111 N)] with Crank hoist.

2.3 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.



2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: coordinate with available current and electrical engineer c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

E. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.



I. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Galvanized Steel Finish: Baked finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports

1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion, and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain doors.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts.

a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides typically and by structural sealant at vertical edges and mechanically with gaskets at horizontal edges at clearstory windows.

2. Exterior manual-swing aluminum doors.


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:

1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units to function properly.

B. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural-sealant joints of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As required for project location - 110 mph 2. Seismic Loads: AS required for project location.

D. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

E. Structural-Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:



1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

G. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

H. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

I. Average Thermal Conductance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.


D. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: For structural-sealant-glazed systems.

E. Product test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility and adhesion of sealants with each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum-framed systems.

1. Determine corrective measures required to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants, including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers.



C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components to function properly.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Non Sloped Store Front: Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer; Trifab VersaGlaze 451T 2. Vistawall Architectural Products; Series Fg-3000

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.



2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components with which it comes in contact.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact.

a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 DOORS

A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: As indicated .

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for

spandrel glazing or panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.



C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).

D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: Class I , clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.

PART 3 - `EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.



D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:

a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure.

2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch

(0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch (3 mm).



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GLAZING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 4. Storefront framing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:


GLAZING 088000 - 2

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:

a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

c. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action.

d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 -inch- (6mm). e. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for

each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4-inch- (6.0 mm) thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite 1/4-inch- (6.0 mm) thick and a nominal 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide interspace.

4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies:

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 3


A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

C. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed

Insulating Glass Units."

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council or Associated Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).


GLAZING 088000 - 4

5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.

B. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

3. Sealing System: Dual seal. 4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction

complying with the following requirements:

a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. EPDM. 2. Silicone. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of


GLAZING 088000 - 6

product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

1. Thickness: 1/4-inch(6.0 mm). 2. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.

B. Uncoated Tinted Float-Glass Units: Class 2 (tinted) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

1. Products:

a. PPG Architectural glass

2. Thickness: 1/4-inch (6.0 mm) . 3. Tint Color: As selected by Architect from PPG Azuria; Solexia; Solargray; Solarbronze. 4. Visible Light Transmittance: .69 minimum. 5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .49 maximum.

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

A. Tinted Insulating-Glass Units:

1. Products:

a. PPG Architectural Glass

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1” and 1/4-inch- (5 and 6.0 mm). 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Outdoor Lite: Class 2 (tinted) float glass.

a. Tint Color: As selected by Architect from PPG Azuria; Solexia; Solargray; or Solarbronze.

b. Kind FT (fully tempered). c. Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.

5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 clear float glass.

a. Kind FT (fully tempered).

6. Visible Light Transmittance: .69 minimum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .49 maximum.

2.10 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

B. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, clear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials – must meet requirements listed on drawings.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; Pyrobel. b. Pilkington Group Limited (distributed by Technical Glass Products); PyroStop. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Contraflam N2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING

A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.

4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270

mm). 7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

3. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

4. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

2. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 22 gauge.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into



top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 18 gauge

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-

mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 22 gauge 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped Asymmetrical Hat shaped.

G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.



1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

C. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

D. Z-Furring Members:



1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches 610 mm o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1

SECTION 092400 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nonstructural steel framing and furring. 2. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath and solid plaster bases. 3. Interior Portland cement plasterwork on metal lath and plaster bases.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each type of colored and textured finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For portland cement plaster assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.

B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 1063. For steel sheet components not included in ASTM C 1063, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Channels: Base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

C. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS

A. Suspended Furring:

1. Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep. 2. Cross Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

B. Direct Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

C. Tie Wire:

1. For tying main runners directly to beams or joists (where wire hangers are used between beams or joists), use double loop of 0.1205-inch- (3.06-mm-) diameter wire.

2. For tying furring directly to steel or wood structure without main runners, use double loop of 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or quadruple loop of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

3. For saddle tying cross furring to main runners use 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

D. Wire Hangers: 0.162-inch- (4.12-mm-) diameter wire.

2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated or 18 gauge if not indicated..

B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated or 18 gauge if not indicated.

C. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep.

1. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.



D. Vertical Furring:

1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

a. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 18 gauge. c. Depth: As indicated or 1 1/2” if not indicated.

2. Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels, in depth indicated 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

2.5 METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring (vertical surfaces); flat (horizontal surfaces).

a. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.

B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip

galvanized zinc coating. 2. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.

a. Small-noseBull-nose style; use unless otherwise indicated.

3. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.

4. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

5. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.

6. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4-to-5/8-inch (6.34-to-16-mm) wide; with perforated flanges.


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.

B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.



C. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads.

D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

F. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated.

G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products:

a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable - Latex.

b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

H. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

1. Products:

a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC 170 Acoustical Sound Sealant - Solvent. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

2.8 PLASTER MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Color for Finish Coats: white.

B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes.

1. Products:



a. Bonsal, W. R. Co.; b. ChemRex, SonoWall Stucco Systems; c. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; d. Parex Incorporated;

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 PLASTER MIXES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes:

1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

c. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material).

C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.

B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.


A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.

B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant.

3.3 INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 for applications indicated.



1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 1063.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

E. Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for partition installation.

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting ceiling loads.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Secure to fastener devices that extend through forms.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

B. Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.

3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install self furring diamond-mesh lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath.

3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.



B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows:

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m). b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not

greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas

(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases.

C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample; interior stucco to match existing finish.

D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

GYPSUM BOARD

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.




A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying to rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. G-P Gypsum. b. National Gypsum Company. c. Temple. d. USG Corporation.

B. Regular Type:

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Type X:


D. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.


E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

1. Thickness: 5/8” (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.



2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

1. Product: Basis of Deisgn: "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum or equal by National Gypsum.

2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified..

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.



3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:



1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: At janitors closets And unconditional spaces.

3.3 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile].

C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.

D. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated]. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

C. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.



C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1

SECTION 095123 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical tile ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items. Show size and location of initial access modules.


D. Maintenance data.


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed

component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch (2.69-mm) diameter wire.

E. Seismic struts and seismic clips.

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING Type A

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Ultima Square Lay-In #1910 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. USG Interiors, Inc.



2. BPB USA

B. Color: White

C. LR: Not less than .9

D. NRC: Not less than .70, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.

E. CAC: Not less than .35

F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square

G. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” exposed tee or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. USG Interiors, Inc.

2. BPB USA

B. Direct-Hung Suspension System: Intermediate-duty structural classification.

C. Access: Upward, with each access unit identified by manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings to substrate at



intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements of the product selected by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. as shown on the drawing shall be used, or a compatible product by one of the following. a. Flexco, Inc. b. Roppe Corporation, USA.



B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 861 1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber thermoplastic) 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I or Group II 3. Style: Cove (base with toe)

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer’s standard length (4’ sections shall not be allowed)

F. Outside Corners: Premanufactured

G. Inside Corners: Job formed

H. Finish:

I. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations or selected by architect from manufacturer’s full range if by other manufacturer.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.



B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Scans shall be a minimum of 4’ from outside corners

G. Place seams at inside corners whenever possible to minimize seams exposure on a flat wall.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



1. Azrock; Custom Cortina

2. Armstrong; Imperial Textures Standard Excelon

3. Tarkett, Inc. thn. chip

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.



1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles basket-weave pattern in pattern of colors and sizes indicated

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

H. All curved cuts in flooring are to be pre-cut with water jet cut or similar means prior to delivery to jobsite. Jobsite curved cuts will not be accepted.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply three coat(s).

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



CARPET 096816 - 1

SECTION 096816 – SHEET

PART 1 - GENERAL

CARPETING

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes tufted.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Seam locations. 3. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 4. Edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 5. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each color and texture required.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.



A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within


CARPET 096816 - 2

specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TUFTED CARPET C-1

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. J & J Commercial RE: Finish Schedule 2. Or equal by Bigelow – color & texture to be approved by architect from manufacturer’s full

range

C. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Guardian soil resistant treatment.

D. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.

C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.


CARPET 096816 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:

1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.



EXTERIOR PAINTS AND COATINGS 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTS AND COATINGS

Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A Exterior paints and coatings systems including; paints, stains, transparent coatings, and opaque finishes.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A Section 050513 - Shop Applied Coatings for Metal B Section 060140 - Architectural Woodwork Refinishing C Section 060583 - Shop Applied Wood Coatings D Section 071900 - Water Repellents. E Section 096700 - Fluid Applied Flooring for Concrete F Section 099300 - Stains and Transparent Finishes G Section 099600 - High-Performance Coatings

1.3 REFERENCES A SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning B SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning C SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning D SSPC-SP 13 / NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete

E EPA-Method 24

F OTC-Regulation No. 41

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should include:

1 Product characteristics 2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3 Primer requirements and finish specification 4 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 5 Application methods 6 Cautions

C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of

manufacture's color samples available.



D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit samples that represents actual product, color, and sheen.

1.5 MOCK-UP Include a mock-up if the project size and/or quality warrant taking such a precaution. The following is

one example of how a mock-up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of the mock-up, consider all the major different types of painting on the project.

A. Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors, & sheens. B. Finish area designated by Architect. C. Provide samples that designate prime & finish coats. D. Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up samples.


A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer’s name, label, and the following list of information:

1 Product name, type (description) 2 Application & use instructions 3 Surface preparation 4 VOC content 5 Environmental issues 6 Batch date 7 Color number

B. Storage: Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based

materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s

instructions. Protect from freezing. C. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the

coatings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Basis of design. The Sherwin-Williams Company

101 Prospect Avenue NW Cleveland, OH 44115 Tel: (800) 321-8194 Fax: (216) 566-1392 www.sherwin-williams.com B. Other acceptable manufacturers subject to approval of APSB: Benjamin Moore ICI

http://www.sherwin-williams.com/�



C. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000 Product Requirements.

When submitting request for substitution, provide complete product data specified above under Submittals, for each substitute product.

2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE

A Use this article to define the scope of painting if not fully defined in a Finish Schedule or on the drawings. This article must be carefully edited to reflect the surfaces actually found on the project. In some cases, it may be enough to use the first paragraph that says, in effect, "paint everything" along with a list of items not to paint, without exhaustively defining all the different surfaces and items that must be painted.

B If the project involves repainting some but not all existing painted surfaces, be sure to indicate the

extent of the repainting. C The descriptions of each system can also be used to further refine the definition of what is to be

painted, stained, or clear finished. 2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Paints and Coatings - General: 1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to

correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

2 For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

B. Primers:

1 Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES:

A Coating Application Accessories: 1 Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-

up materials required per manufacturer’s specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding

B If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. C Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected, and approved by all parties,

otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A Proper product selection, surface preparation, and application affect coating performance.

Coating integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces.



Selection and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating adhesion to the substrate and prolongs the service life of the coating system.

B Selection of the proper method of surface preparation depends on the substrate, the

environment, and the expected service life of the coating system. Economics, surface contamination, and the effect on the substrate will also influence the selection of surface preparation methods.

C The surface must be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint

or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. D Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid household bleach and

3 parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or goggles, waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water solution.

E. No exterior painting should be done immediately after a rain, during foggy weather, when rain is

predicted, or when the temperature is below 50°F, unless products are designed specifically for these conditions. On large expanses of metal siding, the air, surface and material temperatures must be 50°F or higher to use low temperature products.

F Methods:

1 Aluminum Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1,

Solvent Cleaning. 2 Block (Cinder and Concrete) Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete

dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75°F.The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon. On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids with a cement patching compound.

3 Concrete, SSPC-SP13 or NACE 6 This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical,

chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective coating or lining systems. The requirements of this standard are applicable to all types of cementitious surfaces including cast-in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs, masonry walls, and shotcrete surfaces. An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound, uniform substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems.

4 Cement Composition Siding/Panels Remove all surface contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly

and allow to dry. Existing peeled or checked paint should be scraped and sanded to a sound surface. Pressure clean, if needed, with a minimum of 2100 psi pressure to remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laitance, foreign material, and peeling or defective coatings. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon.

5 Exterior Composition Board (Hardboard)



Some composition boards may exude a waxy material that must be removed with a solvent prior to coating. Whether factory primed or unprimed, exterior composition board siding (hardboard) must be cleaned thoroughly and primed with an alkyd primer.

6 Galvanized Metal Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases

and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC-SP7 is necessary to remove these treatments.

7 Steel: Structural, Plate, etc. Should be cleaned by one or more of the ten surface preparations described below. These

methods were originally established by the Steel Structures Painting Council in 1952, and are used throughout the world for describing methods for cleaning structural steel. Visual standards are available through the Steel Structures Painting Council; ask for SSPC-VIS 1-89. A brief description of these standards together with numbers by which they can be specified follow.

8 Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting

compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution frequently so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the cleaning process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation.

9 Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign

matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.

10 Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign

matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.

11 White Metal Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP5 or NACE 1 A White Metal Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all

visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.

12 Commercial Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3 A Commercial Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all

visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for staining. Staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.

13 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4 A Brush-Off Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all

visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and paint may remain on the surface. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil



or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP 1 or other agreed upon methods.

14 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, SSPC-SP11 Metallic surfaces that are prepared according to this specification, when viewed without

magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if the original surface is pitted. Prior to power tool surface preparation, remove visible deposits of oil or grease by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or other agreed upon methods.

15 Near-White Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2 Near White Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all


16 High- and Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting for Steel and Other Hard Materials SSPC-SP12 or NACE 5 This standard provides requirements for the use of high- and ultra-high pressure water jetting

to achieve various degrees of surface cleanliness. This standard is limited in scope to the use of water only without the addition of solid particles in the stream.

17 Water Blasting, NACE Standard RP-01-72 Removal of oil grease dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and loose paint by water at pressures

of 2,000 to 2,500 psi at a flow of 4 to 14 gallons per minute. 18 Stucco Must be clean and free of any loose stucco. If recommended procedures for applying stucco

are followed, and normal drying conditions prevail, the surface may be painted in 30 days. The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon.

19 Wood—Exterior Must be clean and dry. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Knots and pitch streaks must be

scraped, sanded, and spot primed before a full priming coat is applied. Patch all nail holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth.

20 Vinyl Siding, Architectural Plastics, and Fiberglass Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with a warm, soapy water solution. Rinse thoroughly. Do not

paint vinyl siding with any color darker than the original color. Painting with darker colors may cause siding to warp.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A Apply all coatings and materials with manufacture specifications in mind. Mix and thin coatings

according to manufacture recommendation. B Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces.

1 Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer’s procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days.

2 Test new concrete for moisture content.



3 Wait until wood is fully dry after rain or morning fog or dew. C Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. D Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent

sheen.

E Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness.

F Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many

coats as necessary for complete hide. G Exterior Woodwork: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of

woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 2 weeks. H Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the architect or engineer just

prior to each coat. 3.4 PROTECTION

A Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project. B Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer’s

recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the performance of the coatings.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. CEMENT (Stucco) 1st Coat: S-W Loxon® Block Surfacer, A24W00200, 16 mils wet, 8 mils dry. 2nd Coat: S-W Loxon® XP Exterior Waterproofing Systems, A24 Series, 14 – 18 mils wet, 6.4 – 8.3 mils dry. 3rd

6.4 – 8.3 mils dry. Coat: S-W Loxon® XP Exterior Waterproofing Systems, A24 Series, 14 – 18 mils wet,

B. CEMENT (Cementitious Siding) 1st Coat: S-W Loxon® Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. 2nd Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Gloss. 3rd

Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Gloss.

C. METAL (Exposed Exterior Steel) 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66W310. 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54W150. 3rd

Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel, B54W150.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR PAINTS AND COATINGS 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTS AND COATINGS

Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A Interior paint and coatings systems including; paint, stains, transparent coatings, and opaque finishes.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A Section 050513 - Shop Applied Coatings for Metal B Section 060140 - Architectural Woodwork Refinishing C Section 060583 - Shop Applied Wood Coatings D Section 071900 - Water Repellents. E Section 096700 - Fluid Applied Flooring for Concrete F Section 099300 - Stains and Transparent Finishes G Section 099600 - High-Performance Coatings

1.3 REFERENCES A SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning B SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning C SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning D SSPC-SP 13 / NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete

E EPA-Method 24

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A Submit under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. B Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should include:

1 Product characteristics 2 Surface preparation instructions and recommendations 3 Primer requirements and finish specification 4 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 5 Application methods 6 Cautions

C Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of

manufacturer’s color samples available.



D Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit samples that represents actual product, color, and sheen.

1.5 MOCK-UP Include a mock-up if the project size and/or quality warrant taking such a precaution. The following is

one example of how a mock-up on a large project might be specified. When deciding on the extent of the mock-up, consider all the major different types of painting on the project.

A Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors, & sheens. B Finish area designated by Architect. C Provide samples that designate prime & finish coats. D Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock-up samples.


A Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site. Packaging shall bear the manufactures name, label, and the following list of information:

1 Product name, type (description) 2 Application & use instructions 3 Surface preparation 4 VOC content 5 Environmental issues 6 Batch date 7 Color number

B Storage: Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based

materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer’s

instructions. Protect from freezing. C Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the

coatings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not apply coatings under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Basis of design. The Sherwin-Williams Company

101 Prospect Avenue NW Cleveland, OH 44115 Tel: (800) 321-8194 Fax: (216) 566-1392 www.sherwin-williams.com B. Other acceptable manufacturers Benjamin Moore

http://www.sherwin-williams.com/�



ICI

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000 Product Requirements.

When submitting request for substitution, provide complete product data specified above under Submittals, for each substitute product.

2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE

A Use this article to define the scope of painting if not fully defined in a Finish Schedule or on the drawings. This article must be carefully edited to reflect the surfaces actually found on the project. In some cases, it may be enough to use the first paragraph that says, in effect, "paint everything" along with a list of items not to paint, without exhaustively defining all the different surfaces and items that must be painted.

B If the project involves repainting some but not all existing painted surfaces, be sure to indicated

the extent of the repainting. C The descriptions of each system can also be used to further refine the definition of what is to be

painted, stained, or clear finished.

2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A Paints and Coatings - General: 1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to

correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

2 For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.

B Primers:

1 Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A Coating Application Accessories: 1 Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-

up materials required per manufacturer’s specifications. Part 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. Notify

Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding B If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. C Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected, and approved by all parties,

otherwise application of coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION:



A Proper product selection, surface preparation, and application affect coating performance. Coating integrity and service life will be reduced because of improperly prepared surfaces. Selection and implementation of proper surface preparation ensures coating adhesion to the substrate and prolongs the service life of the coating system.

B Selection of the proper method of surface preparation depends on the substrate, the

environment, and the expected service life of the coating system. Economics, surface contamination, and the effect on the substrate will also influence the selection of surface preparation methods.

C The surface must be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint

or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. D Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid household bleach and

3 parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or goggles, waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water solution.

E No exterior painting should be done immediately after a rain, during foggy weather, when rain is

predicted, or when the temperature is below 50°F unless the specified product is designed for the marginal conditions.

F Methods

1 Aluminum Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1,

Solvent Cleaning. 2 Block (Cinder and Concrete) Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete

dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75°F.The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon. On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids with a cement patching compound.

3 Concrete, SSPC-SP13 or NACE 6 This standard gives requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical,

chemical, or thermal methods prior to the application of bonded protective coating or lining systems. The requirements of this standard are applicable to all types of cementitious surfaces including cast-in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs, masonry walls, and shotcrete surfaces. An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of contaminants, laitance, loosely adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound, uniform substrate suitable for the application of protective coating or lining systems.

4 Cement Composition Siding/Panels Remove all surface contamination by washing with an appropriate cleaner, rinse thoroughly

and allow to dry. Existing peeled or checked paint should be scraped and sanded to a sound surface. Pressure clean, if needed, with a minimum of 2100 psi pressure to remove all dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose particles, laitance, foreign material, and peeling or defective coatings. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly. The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon.

5 Copper and Stainless Steel



Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.

6 Drywall—Interior Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be taped and

covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded smooth and all dust removed prior to painting.

7 Galvanized Metal Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases

and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC-SP7 is necessary to remove these treatments.

8 Plaster Must be allowed to dry thoroughly for at least 30 days before painting. Room must be

ventilated while drying; in cold, damp weather, rooms must be heated. Damaged areas must be repaired with an appropriate patching material. Bare plaster must be cured and hard. Textured, soft, porous, or powdery plaster should be treated with a solution of 1 pint household vinegar to 1 gallon of water. Repeat until the surface is hard, rinse with clear water and allow to dry.

9 Steel: Structural, Plate, etc. Should be cleaned by one or more of the ten surface preparations described below. These

methods were originally established by the Steel Structures Painting Council in 1952, and are used throughout the world for describing methods for cleaning structural steel. Visual standards are available through the Steel Structures Painting Council; ask for SSPC-VIS 1-89. A brief description of these standards together with numbers by which they can be specified follow.

10 Solvent Cleaning, SSPC-SP1 Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting

compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution frequently so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the cleaning process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation.

11 Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign

matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.

12 Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign

matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1.

13 White Metal Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP5 or NACE 1 A White Metal Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all

visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.

14 Commercial Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3



A Commercial Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for staining. Staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area and may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discoloration caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied paint. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1 or other agreed upon methods.

15 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4 A Brush-Off Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all

visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and paint may remain on the surface. Before blast cleaning, visible deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP 1 or other agreed upon methods.

16 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal, SSPC-SP11 Metallic surfaces that are prepared according to this specification, when viewed without

magnification, shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portions of pits if the original surface is pitted. Prior to power tool surface preparation, remove visible deposits of oil or grease by any of the methods specified in SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or other agreed upon methods.

17 Near-White Blast Cleaning, SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2 A Near White Blast Cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all


18 High- and Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting for Steel and Other Hard Materials SSPC-SP12 or NACE 5 This standard provides requirements for the use of high- and ultra-high pressure water jetting

to achieve various degrees of surface cleanliness. This standard is limited in scope to the use of water only without the addition of solid particles in the stream.

19 Water Blasting, NACE Standard RP-01-72 Removal of oil grease dirt, loose rust, loose mill scale, and loose paint by water at pressures

of 2,000 to 2,500 psi at a flow of 4 to 14 gallons per minute. 20 Vinyl Siding, Architectural Plastics, and Fiberglass Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with a warm, soapy water solution. Rinse thoroughly. Do not

paint vinyl siding with any color darker than the original color. Painting with darker colors may cause siding to warp.

21 Wood Must be clean and dry. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Knots and pitch streaks must be

scraped, sanded, and spot primed before a full priming coat is applied. Patch all nail holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A Apply all coatings and materials with manufacture specifications in mind. Mix and thin coatings

according to manufacture recommendation.



B Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces.

1 Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer’s procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days.

2 Test new concrete for moisture content. 3 Wait until wood is fully dry after rain , fog or dew.

C Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. D Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent

sheen.

E Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturers recommended dry film thickness.

F Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide,

and uniform appearance. G Exterior Woodwork: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of

woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 2 weeks. H Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the architect or engineer just

prior to each coat. 3.4 PROTECTION

A Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project. B Touch-up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer's

recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the performance of the coatings.

3.5.1 SCHEDULES

A. METAL (Exposed Steel Framing & Detailing) 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66W310. 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200. 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss, B34W200.

B. DRYWALL (Gypsum Board)

1st Coat: S-W Pro Mar 200 Wall Primer, B28W8200. 2nd Coat: S-W Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex, B31W2600. 3rd Coat: S-W Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex, B31W2600.

C. WOOD TRIM

1st Coat: S-W Promar 200, Primer 2nd Coat: S-W Promar 200 Interior Latex, Gloss, B31W2600 3rd Coat: S-W Promar 200 Interior Latex, Gloss, B31W2600



SIGNAGE 101400 - 1

SECTION 101400 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

SIGNAGE

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plaques.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi (103 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi (207 MPa) when tested according to ASTM D 790.

B. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

C. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating:


SIGNAGE 101400 - 2

1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A. 2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in. (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648. 5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber

abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.

2.2 PLAQUES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ASI – Modulux; Emboss or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 2. Gemini Incorporated. 3. Mills Manufacturing Company. 4. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 5. Southwell Company (The).

D. Signage to be coordinated with Architect / Owner for design to contain logo background 1. Public Restrooms 2. Offices 3. Conference Room 4. Storage Rooms 5. Laundry

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 3

2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.

C. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

2.6 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

C. Bracket-Mounted Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TOILET COMPARTMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Product certificates.

E. Maintenance data.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness.

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G).

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.

B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS


1. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

2. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.



3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

4. Santana Products, Inc.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced and Floor anchored.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung and post to ceiling

D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE)] panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Polymer Panel Finish: One color and pattern in each room.

a. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves Caps: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve cap matching that on the pilaster.

G. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or

partially open position. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for

emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.

5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with

regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible.

B. Overhead Bracing: Stainless steel with antigrip profile.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.



B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

E. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves caps at posts to conceal anchorage.

F. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels; 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls.

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than [two brackets attached] [three brackets attached at midpoint and] near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Underlavatory guards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule:

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES


1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design: B-4288 Bobrick 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.



D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-4112 Bobrick 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Capacity: 40 oz. Materials: 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicator: Window type.

E. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-5806 Bobrick 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-270 Bobrick 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Receptacle: Removable. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-165 Bobrick 2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

4. Size: 30” x 48”.

2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS


1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc.

B. Underlavatory Guard:



1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper).

E. Copper-Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper).

F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6 mm thick.



G. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

H. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET FEC

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; c. Potter Roemer LLC;

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. (must meet ADA)

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth. 2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 4-inch (102-mm) maximum backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. 2.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words FIRE EXTINGUISHER.



1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened or manufacturers standards. 3) Lettering Color: White. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Exterior of cabinet door and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

b. Interior of cabinet and door.

2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated[or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

E. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

F. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type FE-1: UL-rated 5 lbs nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. (At non kitchen locations).

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Horizontal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 133419 - 1

SECTION 133419 -

PART 1 - GENERAL

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing, roof panels, wall panels, soffit panels and accessories.

B. See Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor-bolt installation.

1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."

2. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings

B. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component indicated.


1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location.

3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections.

4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work; show locations of exposed fasteners.



C. Samples: For each type of building component and for each color and texture required.

D. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:

1. Name and location of Project. 2. Order number. 3. Name of manufacturer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. 6. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-

rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. 7. Governing building code and year of edition. 8. Design loads and load combinations. 9. Building-use category. 10. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and

components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements.

G. Manufacturer certificate.

H. Surveys: Show final elevations and locations of major members. Have surveyor who performed surveys certify their accuracy.


A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.

1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

D. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.

E. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses.



F. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

2. Review structural load limitations. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.


A. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.


A. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs equipment supports and roof penetrations, which are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Buildings Company. 2. American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 3. Behlen Mfg. Co. 4. Butler Manufacturing Company. 5. Ceco Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 6. Mesco Metal Buildings; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 7. Metallic Metal Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, LLP. 8. Package Industries, Inc. 9. Southern Structures, Inc. 10. Spirco Manufacturing; Division of Metal Building Products, Inc. 11. Steelox Systems Inc. 12. United Structures of America, Inc. 13. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380).

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing.

F. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480).

G. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

H. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers.

I. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.



1. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with splined ends.

J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.

K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.

L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.

M. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193/A 193M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.

N. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.

2.3 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), with G90 (Z275) coating designation.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on

Drawings: a. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x

(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions, except as modified below:

1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.

b. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).



2.4 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type I, or NAIMA 202, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less.

B. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, type indicated below; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Type: III (blankets with reflective membrane covering).

2. Minimal R –Valve, R-19: Contractor to provide necessary spaces to achieve this level of insulation.

C. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing.

D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2.5 DOOR AND FRAME MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.


A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.

2. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer.

3. Fasteners for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or self-tapping Type 304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.



D. Metal Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant.

2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."

B. Metal Panels: Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel.

2.8 STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. General:

1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.

a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding

process. c. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed

structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings.

d. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.

2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.

a. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication.

B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated.

1. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted.

2. Frame Configuration: Single gable 3. Exterior Column Type: Tapered. 4. Rafter Type: Tapered.



C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted assembly to comply with the following:

1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm).

2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm); or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes.

D. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following:

1. Purlins: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges.

a. Depth: As indicated.

2. Girts: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges.

a. Depth: As indicated.

3. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.

4. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch (51-by-51-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles or 1-inch (25-mm) diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.

5. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch (25-by-25-by-3-mm) structural-steel angles. 6. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch (76-by-51-by-1.5-mm) zinc-coated

(galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, steel sheet. Provide

galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized framing members. 8. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from

minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 9. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-

mm-) thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

10. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

E. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:

1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) at each end.



2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc-coated, 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors.

3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads.

4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.

5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.

6. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels.

7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option.

F. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated or hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.

G. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).

a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) on each side.

2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment.

2.9 METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels.

1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 26 Gauge -.0217 inch thick minimum

a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, fixed type; fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel 3. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded as standard with manufacturer. 4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches (406 mm). 5. Panel Height: 2 inches (51 mm).

2.10 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL WALL PANELS

A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.

1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 26 Gauge -.0217 inch thick minimum



2. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm). 5. Panel Height: 1.125 inches (29 mm) minimum.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels.

2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load requirements.

3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels.

2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- (0.40-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.

1. Opening Trim: 26 Gauge -.0217 inch thick minimum thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

E. Gutters: Formed from minimum 0.0159-inch- (0.40-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and



other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2438-mm-) long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches (900 mm) o.c.

F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.0159-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets.

1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet (3 m) o.c.

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be[ tested and] inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Before erection proceeds, engage land surveyor to survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances.

B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

D. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

E. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

F. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.



1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do

not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

H. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and snug-tightened or pretensioned joints.

I. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts.

1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows,

louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

J. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.

1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.

K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.

2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated.



3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

4. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.

5. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material.

B. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.

B. Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer

tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 3. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 4. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls and each side of ridge and hip

caps.

C. Field-Assembled, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

2. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels; on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels; and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.

3. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

D. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.



3.4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum. 2. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable

panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 3. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to

thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 4. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter

of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 6. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and

concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 7. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping

screws. 8. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.

B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing.

B. Flash and seal metal soffit panels with weather closures where panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings.

3.6 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS

A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over

insulation with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder.

B. Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method:

1. Over-Framing Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal roof panels fastened to secondary framing.

2. Between-Purlin Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry vapor-retarder facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course maintaining continuity of retarder. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation.

3. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs.

4. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.



C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing.

1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.

3.7 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION

A. General: Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.

B. Personnel Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames according to ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with DHI A115.IG. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in their respective frames.

1. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to, and doors with clearances specified in, NFPA 80.

C. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

3.8 WINDOW INSTALLATION

A. Seal perimeter of each window frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.

B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

3.9 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.



C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing, bearing plates, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.


150000 - 1


SECTION 150000 - AIR CONDITIONING AND HEATING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Work intended under this section consists of furnishing labor and materials necessary to install all

work complete, including equipment, insulation, piping, sheet metal, controls, supports, accessories, etc., and ready for operation. Refer to each individual Mechanical Sheet (M-Series in the plans) for exact details and manufacturer and model numbers.

1.2 LAWS, PERMITS AND FEES: A. All work shall be installed in accordance with all local and state codes and laws in effect. All fees

for inspections shall be paid for by Contractor. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Submittal of bid shall indicate that the Contractor has examined the drawings and has included all

required allowances in the bid. Locations shown for piping, ductwork, outlets, etc., are approximate and the Architect or Engineer reserves the right to make reasonable changes, without additional cost, before roughing-in.

1.4 DRAWINGS: A. The Contractor shall carefully examine plans and be responsible for proper fitting and operation of

materials and equipment. Although locations of equipment, piping and ductwork maybe shown in certain positions, the Contractor shall be guided by conditions on the job and details, coordinating this work with that of others. It is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories required due to the small scale of drawings. The drawings limit, explain and define conditions, specify requirements, show piping and equipment sizes and locations, and general arrangement of systems. All changes to be authorized by the Architect or Engineer before proceeding. Extra charges not allowed for these changes. NO DEVIATIONS ARE ALLOWED FROM THE DRAWINGS EXCEPT WITH ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER'S AUTHORIZATION. Ask for additional details if there is an uncertainty regarding the work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION: A. The Contractor shall erect equipment, ducts and piping in a neat and workmanlike manner and

align and adjust for satisfactory operation. All components shall be installed so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be made readily, and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operating, maintenance and repair.

150000 - 2

2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit five copies of drawings of all equipment furnished under this contract. Drawings submitted

show construction details, dimensions and capacities. Review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing materials of proper capacity, quantity, and quality, nor will the review relieve the Contractor from any responsibility from errors in shop drawings. Where changes from the contract documents are proposed, these changes shall be indicated in red, clouded, bold print or otherwise marked to stand out. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in contract documents.

2.3 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: A. See each individual drawing sheet for details. 2.4 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS AND AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES: B. See each individual drawing sheet for details. 2.5 INSULATION: C. See each individual drawing sheet for details. 2.6 SHEET METAL WORK: A. All sheet metal work shall be first quality prime standard galvanized steel. Ducts shall be installed

as shown on drawings, and conforming to all structural and finish conditions of building. Duct construction shall conform to ASHRAE and SMACNA. All rectangular supply and return ducts shall be wrapped with 1.5” thickness ‘Ductwrap’ or equal.

2.7 DUCT RUNOUTS: A. Joval type round pipe with 1.5” ductwrap type external instulation or as required by the local

authorities. Flexible duct may be used for the last 3 feet of the duct at the grille 2.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: D. See each individual drawing sheet for details. 2.11 TESTS AND ADJUSTING: A. All piping and ductwork shall be checked and/or tested by the Architect or Engineer before being

concealed. The Architect or Engineer shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to inspection time. 2.12 VENTILATING SYSTEMS: E. See each individual drawing sheet for details.

150000 - 3

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM BALANCING: A. Upon completion of installation and startup of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust and

balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space or as stated on each individual drawing sheet.

3.2 GUARANTEE A. On completion of the contract, the Contractor shall guarantee that the system for one (1) year from

date of final acceptance will perform as installed or repair or replace the defective equipment. Any guarantee herein written shall be supplementary to and not in lieu of warranties implied under Louisiana Law.

END OF SECTION

151000-1

Ascension Maintenance Building J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners Ascension Parish, Louisiana domain design architecture SECTION 151000 - PLUMBING SCOPE: Work intended under this section includes furnishing all labor and materials necessary to completely install plumbing work including; equipment, insulation piping, sheet metal, controls, supports, accessories and any other necessary materials needed to make system ready for operation. Refer to each individual Plumbing Sheet (P-Series in the plans) for exact details and manufacturer and model numbers. Work includes, but not limited to, basically the following: (1) Installation of sanitary drainage and vent system (2) Installation of domestic cold water system (3) Installation of domestic hot water system

(3) Installation of storm drain system (4) Miscellaneous items as covered on drawings and in specifications (5) Compliance with all local and state codes

(6) Guarantee work for one year LAWS, PERMITS, FEES AND SERVICES: Plumbing work shall be installed in accordance with all local and state codes and laws in effect during time of construction whether shown and specified or not. All fees for permits, inspection, connections, etc., paid for by Contractor. Contractor shall also make application for and pay for new meter installations, including services. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: In addition to work covered under this section, a complete set of plans shall be checked to insure that all conditions, equipment, materials are furnished and installed and the system is in satisfactory working order. When the bid is submitted, that shall indicate that Contractor has examined the site as it relates to all visible existing conditions, examined all drawings and included all required allowances in the bid No allowances shall be made for errors resulting from Contractors failure to visit job site and review drawings. Locations shown for piping, ductwork, outlets, etc. are approximate. Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes, without additional cost, before roughing-in. Refer to architectural drawings for reflected ceiling plan, height and location. Work called for in specifications yet not shown on drawings; or work shown on drawings yet not called for in specifications shall be performed as if described in both. Should work be required--

151000-2

which is nevertheless necessary for proper conveyance of intent--Contractor shall perform work as if particularly described. DRAWINGS: General arrangement of work indicated on plans. Contractor shall carefully examine plans and accept responsibility for proper fitting and operation of materials and equipment. Although locations of equipment, piping and ductwork may be shown in certain positions, Contractor shall be guided by conditions on job and architectural details, correlating this work with that of others. Due to small scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories required. Contractor shall carefully investigate conditions affecting work and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing fittings, valves, traps and accessories to accommodate conditions. Drawings limit, explain and define conditions, specify requirements, show piping and equipment sizes and locations, and general arrangement of systems. All changes to be authorized by Architect before proceeding. Extra charges not allowed for these changes. NO DEVIATIONS ALLOWED FROM DRAWINGS WITHOUT ARCHITECT'S AUTHORIZATION. Details shown on drawings for clarification. Ask for additional details if uncertainty regarding work. Lack of details no excuse for improper installation. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION: All materials shall be new and conforming to the quality specified. Equipment and accessories not specifically described or identified by manufacturer's catalog numbers shall have neat and finished appearance and be designed in accordance with ASME, AIEE or other applicable technical standard suitable for maximum working pressures. Installation: Erect equipment, ducts and piping in neat and workmanlike manner; align and adjust for satisfactory operation. Install so connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be readily made so all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operating, maintenance and repair. Workmanship shall be of highest quality. SHOP DRAWINGS: Refer to Article 3.12 of General Conditions regarding shop drawings. Particular attention is called to 3.12.5 for contractor's action and 3.12.9 for resubmitted items. Submit five copies of drawings of all equipment furnished under this contract. Drawings submitted show construction details, dimensions and capacities. All equipment submittals shall be identified and marked to specifically indicate items or equipment to be furnished. Where changes from contract documents are proposed, these changes shall be clearly marked or indicated. Unmarked submittals will be returned unchecked.

151000-3

Review of shop drawings by Engineer shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing material of proper dimensions, quantity, and quality. Nor shall it relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings. Contractor shall check shop drawings to determine their completeness and accuracy for construction purposes prior to submission of such drawings to Architect and Engineer. Where changes from contract documents are proposed, these changes shall be indicated. Submission shall be referenced properly to indicate location, service and function of each item. Where manufacturer's publications in the form of catalogs, pamphlets or other data sheets are submitted, these submissions shall specifically indicate item being reviewed. Manufacturer shall certify on shop drawings that equipment, materials, etc. meet requirements of plans, specifications and published addenda. Any exceptions shall be noted in bold print. Corrections or comments made on shop drawings during this review do not relieve Contractor from compliance with requirements of drawings and specifications. This check is for “general conformance review only” with information given in contract documents. WATER SYSTEMS: Domestic cold and hot water systems installed as shown, branch lines run full size to all fixtures, equipment, etc. Branch lines shall be l/2" minimum. Piping Above Slab: Type 'L' hard copper water tubing (ASTM Spec. B-88-55) with wrought copper solder type fittings (ANSI Std. B16.22-1951). Joints made with 95-5 "lead-free" solder. "Lead-free" when used with respect to solder and flux refers to solder and flux containing not more than 0.2 percent lead. Piping Under Slab: Type 'L' soft copper without joints for sizes 1" and less; over 1" Type 'L' hard copper with wrought copper solder fittings and joints made with silver solder. Exterior Water Service: Type 'L' hard copper with joints of 95-5 solder. Sch. 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC-CS-207-60 and 61) plastic pipe and fittings approved for potable water with cemented joints. Air Chambers: Provided on both cold and hot water lines at each group of fixtures. Air chambers 12" high, same size as branch feed line and concealed in partitions. Valves: 150 lb. bronze gate valves, rising stems, solder ends as made by Hammond, NIBCO or Mueller. Sterilization: Sterilize all new water lines in accordance with Article 12:020-2 of the State Sanitary Code using a chlorine dose of at least 50 mg/1. Chlorinating period shall be three hours

151000-4

(min.) or until chlorine residual, at pipe extremities and at other representative points, shall be at least 5 mg/1. If the residual is less than 5 mg/1, repeat the disinfection procedure. SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM: Sanitary drainage and vent system installed as shown on drawings. Drainage lines graded 1/8" per foot fall for 4" lines and 1/4" for 2"-3" lines. Exterior lines graded as shown. Each fixture vented same size as waste except water closets. All changes in direction shall be made by appropriate use of; 45 degree wyes, half wyes long sweep bends--except that sanitary tees may be used in vertical stacks, short bends or elbows may be used in drainage lines where change of direction is from horizontal to vertical. Slip joints permitted only in trap seals or on inlet side of trap. Pipe and Fittings: All drainage and vent piping under building of centrifugal spun service weight cast iron pipe and fittings (ANSI Std. A 40.1), or 'PVC' pipe and fittings. Exterior sanitary sewer lines shall be of 'PVC' (PVC-CS-207-60 and 61) pipe and fittings. Joints on cast iron pipe gasketed for bell and spigot pipe and made with neoprene sealing shield and stainless steel shield on "no-hub" pipe and joints on plastic shall be made with solvent cement. Cleanouts: Cleanouts provided where shown and as required by local code. Cleanouts to be caulked into pipe and connected to line with "Y" or sanitary tee. Cleanouts to be same size as pipe. Cleanouts to be brass screw type, Wade W-6000 for floors and W-8480-R series for walls. Covers shall be nickel-bronze for floors and S.S. for walls. INSTALLATION OF PIPING: Systems installed to make complete working systems in accordance with intent of drawings and specifications. Piping installed with runs straight and true. Piping lowered, raised or offset as required due to ducts, conduit, job conditions, etc. Piping shall be installed carefully to provide for proper alignment, slope and expansion. All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be installed uniformly in straight parallel lines. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings except for soft copper tubing. Provide pipe sleeves of 24 Ga. galvanized iron for pipes passing through footings, grade beams, etc. Allow 3/4" clearance around pipe. Provide thimbles, inserts, etc., as required for installation of piping. Piping to all fittings and fixtures positively supported and strapped or fastened in wall or chase to make firm, solid installation. Flexible connections shall not be used for water heater connections. UNIONS: Malleable iron, ground joint, threaded unions, 125 psi for use on steel pipe. Unions on copper tubing shall be copper to copper type, 125 psi.

151000-5

INSULATED CONNECTIONS: Connections to outside systems such as water and gas meters of dissimilar metals shall be made with insulated (dielectric) type unions equivalent to Stockham No. 693-1/2 or Dresser Style 39 insulated coupling. HANGERS: Overhead horizontal runs of piping shall be supported with split ring hangers, using rods securely attached to structure. Hanger spaces maximum of 10'-0" for steel, 8'-0" for copper and 5'-0" for plastic and cast iron. ESCUTCHEONS: No. 10 B & C split ring, C.P. brass, floor and ceiling plates shall be provided on all pipes passing exposed through walls, floors and ceilings. INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES: Fixtures and similar equipment shall be supported and fastened in satisfactory manner to make installation firm and rigid. Fixture supports or blocking shall be provided in wall or chase as required to support fixtures securely. Water supply to each fixture or piece of equipment provided with stop valve. Fixtures have rigid supply to wall with wheel handle stop and flexible risers, chrome plated when exposed. Fixtures have cold water on right side and hot water on left. Nipples shall be made of brass. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to sanitary system provided with trap. Each trap placed as near fixture as possible and no fixture double-trapped. All 'P' traps for fixtures, sinks, etc., 17 Ga. bent tube with cleanouts, chromium plated when exposed. All nipples used throughout water and drainage system shall be of same materials as piping.

WATER HEATER: Electric storage type water heater with R-Foam or fiberglass insulation and enamel finish outer casing. Heating elements shall be direct contact type. Thermostat shall be surface mounted and adjustable for automatic temperature control. The Heater shall have "ON-OFF" switch and front access panel for electrical connections. Storage tank for 127.5 psi working pressure and shall be steel, glasslined. See each individual drawing sheet for water heater sizes, capacities, manufacturer and model numbers. Relief valve shall be temperature and pressure type, with testing lever, and with discharge piped to floor drain or outside of building. PLUMBING FIXTURES: See each individual drawing sheet for water heater sizes, capacities, manufacturer and model numbers. Brass for fixtures shall be chromium plated and of same manufacturer as fixtures. All faucets have aerators unless otherwise specified. All piping, valve, traps, etc., connecting to chromium plated trim shall be chromium plated to correspond. Exposed bolts, nuts, screws, caps, etc. shall be chromium plated. Refer to "Installation of fixtures" for stops and traps.

151000-6

All devices, parts and accessories necessary for complete and satisfactory installation and operation of fixtures must be furnished and installed. Refer to architectural drawings in addition to mechanical for location and number of fixtures required. THERMAL INSULATION: After piping has been cleaned and satisfactory tests completed, piping shall be insulated. Pipe insulation applied with joints tightly butted. Covering or jacket on insulation shall be lapped and tightly cemented with seam out of sight when possible. All pipe, fittings, valves, etc. shall be covered same as piping. At unions or flanges insulation beveled to allow removal. Provide aluminum bands on insulation, three to length of covering and on each side of each fitting. Piping with Universal or FRJ jacket may have bands omitted if joints are cemented neatly. No duct tape will be accepted. Provide 12 Ga. galvanized shields, 6" long and 180 deg., between hanger and insulation. All products and accessories shall conform to Life Safety Specifications and Section 719, Standard Building Code (SBC), 1979 edition as amended. Concealed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-50 and a smoke developed of 0-450. Exposed insulation shall have a flame spread of 0-50 and a smoke developed of 0-450. Insulation shall be as hereinafter specified and shall be as manufactured by Armstrong, CertainTeed, Owens-Corning, PPC or Pittsburgh Corning. Pre-insulated, pre-fabricated fittings with plastic cover may be used in lieu of ells. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. Domestic Hot Water: Cover all hot water lines above ground with standard thickness fiberglass insulation with Universal jacket. Fittings covered with insulating cement, covered with glass fitting cloth, finished with Benjamin Foster 30-60. Cold Water: Cover all cold water lines in attic, exterior walls and all horizontal runs in ceiling spaces with standard thickness fiberglass, same as hot water. Domestic Cold and Hot Water: Cover all hot water lines and all cold water lines in attics, exterior walls and horizontal runs in ceiling spaces with 1/2" expanded foam plastic with self-sealing joints and thermal conductivity of 0.27. Drainage Lines: Cover all horizontal runs of roof drainage and all horizontal runs of sanitary sewer lines carrying air conditioning condensate in ceiling spaces with 1-1/2" thickness x 3/4 lb. ductwrap with aluminum foil vapor barrier applied by manufacturer. Insulation shall be secured with staples and covered with aluminum foil tape. Fittings insulated same as pipe.

151000-7

INSPECTIONS, TESTING AND ADJUSTING: Water, gas, drainage and vent piping tested and checked by Architect before acceptance. Underground piping tested prior to backfilling. All underground piping shall be tested at same time. Piping may be partially covered but joints left uncovered. Architect shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to test, and pressure shall not be taken off or pipes covered until checked. Defects shall be made good to the satisfaction of Architect and work retested. Tests shall be held on pipes 24 hours prior to inspection. Water: Test all water under 200 pounds hydrostatic pressure. Leave water piping under pressure of supply main for balance of construction period. Drainage and Vents: Test drainage and vent system in its entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged except highest opening. System shall be filled with water and allowed to stand for one hour before inspection. System shall be tested with not less than ten-foot head of water. Plumbing Fixtures: Fill with water and allow to stand for one hour. Check for leaks or retarded flow. Remove and clean all aerators. INTERFERENCES: Drawings generally diagrammatic and Contractor to coordinate his work with other trades so interferences of equipment, piping, etc., avoided. In event interference occurs between Contractor's work and other trades, Architect to state which equipment, piping, etc., relocated regardless of which item first installed. EXCAVATION: Trenches for all underground piping excavated to required depths and of proper width for installation of piping. After piping tested and inspected trenches backfilled with earth free of debris and trash. Backfill well tamped, in 9-inch layers. Finished fill thoroughly watered. After settling is complete, surface at finished level. Piping to have 1'-6" minimum cover. GUARANTEE: All workmanship and material guaranteed for period of one year from date of official acceptance of contract, unless otherwise stated in specifications and Contractor responsible for any adjustments, replacement and corrections which may be necessary to restore project to first class condition if deficiency is due to faulty workmanship or materials. Any guarantees herein written shall be supplementary to and not in lieu of warranties implied under State Law. END OF SECTION

160001-1

SECTION 160001 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to install a complete and operational

electrical system at the Ascension Parish Department of Public Works Maintenance Building as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings.

The work at the facility consists of the following areas:

Section Item

160001 General Electrical Provisions

160002 Raceways, Fittings, and Boxes 160003 Underground Duct System 160004 Wires and Cables (Power and Control) 160007 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment 160008 Lighting Fixtures and Accessories

B. The proposed Division 16 Electrical shall be as follows:

Furnishing and installation of the following items shall be the responsibility of applicable portions of Division 16.

1. Furnish and install conduit and feeders. 2. Furnish and install receptacles with conduit and wiring required. 3. Furnish and install control panels and devices controlling mechanical equipment. 4. Furnish and install conduit and wiring required for connection of mechanical equipment

furnished under other sections of these specifications. 5. Furnish and install lighting fixtures, switches, conduit and wiring required.

C. Furnish all conduit, wire, control equipment and field connections as required for all motors and

process equipment furnished under other sections of these Specifications. D. Mount and make field connections to "packaged" equipment, controls, and devices furnished under

other Sections of these Specifications. E. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the

service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished under the contract bid price.

1.02 SERVICE AND METERING A. The power serving this project is 120/208v, 3ph, 4w overhead. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The complete installation shall comply with all applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code,

the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, with additions and the requirements of any local codes effective at the site.

B. Codes and standards referenced shall be considered minimum acceptable work. C. Referenced codes shall include the following:

American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)

160001-2

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) Instrument Society of America (ISA) Insulated Cable Engineers' Association (ICEA) Joint Industrial Council (JIC) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1.04 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall pay for all permits, inspections and fees arising from the above referenced

Codes and Ordinances. 1.05 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. During the period of construction, the electrical plans will be complemented with detail drawings, as

may be necessary in the opinion of the Engineer, to show the proper installation of various appliances or equipment with relation to the project.

B. The drawings and specifications are intended to be descriptive only, and any error or omissions of

detail in either shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligations thereunder to install in correct detail any and all materials necessary for complete and operating electrical systems to the extent shown on the Drawings and described in this Specification.

C. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets, and similar

devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only unless detailed or dimensioned. The exact locations and routing of cables and conduits shall be governed by structural conditions, physical interference, and the location of electrical terminations on equipment. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work, and, in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer, and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

D. The Contractor shall examine the architectural, structural, mechanical, and instrumentation plans and

shop drawings for the various equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all conduits and cables. Conduits shall be stubbed up as near as possible to equipment terminals.

E. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. Each three-phase circuit shall

be run in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs", all necessary fittings and junction boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. The Contractor shall coordinate and obtain approval from the Engineer during construction for the final routing of all "home-run" circuits. "Home-run" circuits shown concealed shall be run concealed unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.

F. Verify with the Engineer the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and

receptacles prior to installation. G. Any work installed contrary to or without approval by the Engineer shall be subject to change as

directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. H. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by spacers to provide

a clearance between wall and equipment. I. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Furnish all

labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the equipment.

J. All connections to equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with the approved shop

160001-3

drawings. 1.06 SHOP OR ERECTION DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall prepare shop drawings for all parts of his work. Before commencing any work

or providing any material, the Contractor shall submit for review by the Engineer all drawings relating to the construction, arrangement or disposition of the equipment entering into the contract, and show the complete equipment with manufacturer's specifications of same.

B. Shop drawings of the following equipment shall be submitted for the Engineer's review:

Control panels Lighting Fixtures

C. Shop drawings shall be fully descriptive of all the materials and equipment to be incorporated into this

project. The Contractor shall carefully check all his shop drawings making sure they are complete in all details and cover the specific items as hereinafter specified.

D. Prior to submittal, all shop drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy and coordination

with the respective associated electrical devices, and equipment and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned.

E. The Engineer's check shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the project and

compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. The responsibility of, or the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings and coordination with associated devices and equipment which may not be indicated on the shop drawings is included under the work of this Section.

F. The responsibility for all dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site and for coordination

of this work with the work of all other trades is also included under the work of this Section. G. No material or equipment shall be allowed at the site until shop drawings reviewed by the Engineer

are received by the resident engineer at the site. H. It shall be the electrical contractor's responsibility to obtain copies of all mechanical shop drawings for

verification and coordination of all electrical requirements for actual equipment furnished. I. The Contractor shall submit for approval, prior to installation, a final electrical equipment layout

drawing at all buildings. This drawing shall show actual dimensions and locations of all electrical equipment.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

A. All materials, equipment, and accessories installed under this Contract, whether approved or not, shall be new and shall conform to all rules, codes, etc., as recommended or adopted by the National Association(s) governing the manufacture, rating and testing of such materials, equipment and accessories.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 LABOR AND PROGRESS A. The Contractor shall employ a competent electrical foreman on the job throughout the entire

period of construction to see that his work is carried on without delay and completed as rapidly as possible. Electrical foreman must be approved by the Engineer in writing. Delays in approval of the foreman will be the responsibility of the contractor.

B. The foreman shall be empowered by the Contractor to make decisions relating to the electrical

160001-4

work proposed in this project. 3.02 SLEEVES, FORMS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for laying out and installing his work in advance of the pouring

of pads, floors, walls, etc., and shall furnish and install all sleeves that may be required for the electrical work. Sleeves shall be provided for all conduits penetrating walls, partitions, and floors.

B. Where required sleeves and inserts are not properly installed, the Contractor will be required to do

the necessary cutting and patching later at his own expense to the Engineer's satisfaction. C. All forming for exterior lighting pole boxes, equipment pads, duct runs, etc., shall be furnished by

the Contractor under applicable portions of Division 16. 3.03 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and setting all anchor bolts, channels, etc., required

to install his equipment. B. Where electrical equipment is located on damp or wet walls, walls exposed to weather, or other

locations as directed, it shall be “stand-off" mounted 1/2-inch from the wall in a manner so that the rear of the equipment is freely exposed to air circulation. The method of mounting shall be approved by the Engineer before equipment is installed.

C. All equipment enclosures shall be of the NEMA classification noted on the plan drawings for the area

in which the device will be mounted. 3.04 EQUIPMENT STORAGE AND INSTALLATION A. All electrical equipment entering into this contract including motor control center, starters,

transformers, lighting fixtures, etc., shall be stored before installation in a warm dry indoor area adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Equipment stored outdoors under tarpaulins or plastic covers will not be considered as meeting this requirement. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage will be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried and put through such special tests as directed by the Engineer or shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The installation of electrical equipment shall not begin until the structures are complete enough to

provide protection from weather and vandalism (i.e., walls, doors, windows, and roof installed). C. The Contractor shall investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to

reach its final location. If necessary, the manufacturer shall be required to ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through such restricted areas in the structure.

3.05 AS BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a neatly marked set of record drawings showing the installed location

and/or routing of conduits, cables, pull boxes, junction boxes, and outlets. All deviations from the control schematics required by equipment actually utilized are to be kept current with the work and subject to inspection by the Engineer at any time. Two sets of marked final record drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the work.

Particular care shall be given to describing the exact locations of all exterior conduit, duct banks, control circuits, conduit schedules, cable schedules, and single line modifications.

3.06 TEST AND REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall assist in making periodic inspections or tests required by the Architect or Engineer. When requested, the Contractor shall provide the

assistance of foremen and qualified craftsmen for reasonable duration of each

160001-5

test, etc.

B. Contactors: After all wires and cables are in place but before connection to motors or devices, the electrical system shall be subjected to an insulation test with a 500 volt D.C. megger. Single conductor cables shall be replaced if the resistance to ground is less than 10 megohms. Tests conducted on wires serving loads of 50 hp or larger shall be recorded on the motor test data sheet.

C. Electrical Apparatus, Fixtures and Wiring Devices: Any equipment, fixtures or device found to be

grounded or shorted shall be removed and replaced. D. Ground System: Each and all grounded cases and metal parts associated with electrical equipment

shall be tested for continuity of connection with the ground bus system by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer or his representatives.

E. Make all circuit breakers and protective relay settings. The Contractor shall test all protective relays

and circuit breakers for calibration and proper operations. Test shall be by an independent testing firm, and a certified test report shall be submitted stating that the equipment meets and operates in accordance with the manufacturer and the job specifications, and that the equipment and installation conforms to all applicable standards and specifications.

3.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, junction boxes, control

stations, etc.) furnished under this Section shall be identified by the name of the process equipment or other facility component it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, and other devices shall have nameplates describing respective equipment.

B. The identification method shall be laminated plastic nameplates. Nameplates shall be as detailed on

the drawings. C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA 1 enclosures. Nameplates shall be cemented to all

other enclosure types using epoxy or other approved adhesive. Where the equipment size does not have space for mounting a nameplate, the nameplate shall be cemented to the adjacent mounting surface. Cemented nameplates shall not be drilled.

3.08 FINAL CLEAN UP A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and legal disposal of all debris and unused

equipment which he introduces to the project site during the execution of his contract. B. The Contractor shall vacuum clean the interior of all motor control centers, panelboards, junction

boxes, and other enclosures supplied under this project containing electrical equipment to remove all dirt, metal clips, stripped insulation, etc., from the enclosure.

C. Motor Control Centers, starters, disconnects, panelboards, and other equipment which has factory

baked enamel paint (or similar approved painting technique) will not be field painted with the exception of touch up paint to nicks and scratches caused during shipment or installation.

END OF SECTION

160002-1

Ascension Maintenance Building J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners Ascension Parish, Louisiana domain design architecture SECTION 160002 - RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND BOXES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete and ready for

use, the electrical raceways and fittings as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. All raceways and fittings of a given type shall be the product of one manufacturer. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL RIGID CONDUIT (GRC) A. Steel conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized after threading as manufactured by the Triangle Conduit

and Cable, Westmoreland Conduit Co., or equal. 2.02 PVC CONDUIT A. The material shall be extruded from a polyvinyl chloride compound to form a Schedule 40 heavy wall

conduit. The conduit shall comply with the wall and O.D. dimensions for standard sized steel conduit. The conduit shall be either a continuous length or joined into a continuous length by butt fusion or solvent welding in the field. The conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon, Phillips Petroleum Co., Triangle Pipe & Tube Co., or equal.

2.03 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit shall be Sealtite, Type UA manufactured by the Anaconda Metal

Hose Division, American Brass Co., equal by American Flexible Conduit, or Universal Metal Hose Co., or equal.

B. Fittings used with flexible conduit shall be of the screw-in type as manufactured by the Thomas and

Betts Co., Triangle Conduit and Cable, Electrical Fittings, or equal. C. Flexible couplings shall be Crouse-Hinds Co., Appleton Electric Co., Thomas and Betts Co., or equal. 2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID CONDUIT (ARC) A. Aluminum conduit shall be manufactured from copper free aluminum, alloy Grade 6063, and shall be

suitable for use in corrosive environments. 2.05 PVC COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall utilize rigid steel conduit in accordance with the above paragraph

and in addition shall have an outer jacket of 40 mil PVC permanently bonded to the outer surface. B. Conduit shall be as manufactured by Robroy, Occential Coating Co., or equal. 2.06 BOXES AND FITTINGS (POWER & CONTROL) A. Terminal boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc., shall conform to the following Specifications

dependent upon the area NEMA classifications as noted on the Drawings.

160002-2

B. NEMA 1 areas surface mount: Boxes in NEMA 1 areas shall be sheet steel unless otherwise shown

on the Drawings. Boxes shall be hot dipped galvanized and have continuously welded seams. Welds shall be ground smooth and galvanized. Box bodies shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies shall not be less than 14 gauge metal and covers shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. Covers shall be gasketed and fastened with stainless steel screws. Conduit connections shall be by conduit hubs only. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co. or equal.

C. NEMA 1 areas flush mount: Pressed steel switch and outlet boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized as

manufactured by the Adelet Co., O.Z. Manufacturing Co., or equal. D. NEMA 4 areas: Boxes in NEMA 4 areas shall be of the cast aluminum or cast iron type. Cast

aluminum boxes shall be manufactured from copper free aluminum and cast iron boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Boxes shall be furnished with gasketed covers and corrosion resistant mounting hardware. Products shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co., Appleton Electric Co., Killark Electric Co., or equal.

E. NEMA 4x areas: Boxes in NEMA 4x areas shall be manufactured of a Type 316 stainless steel. Back

and sides shall be welded to form a one piece construction. Doors or covers shall be attached with #316 stainless steel captive fasteners or hinges. The cover to box joints shall be made watertight with a mechanically retained gasket. Boxes shall be Krydon as manufactured by Nelson Electric, or equal. Cast aluminum boxes are approved for NEMA 4x areas.

F. NEMA 7 areas: Boxes in NEMA 7 areas shall be of the watertight (NEMA 4) explosion proof type.

Body and covers shall be constructed of copper free cast aluminum with zinc plated steel attachment hardware and stainless steel hinges. Waterproof gasket shall be neoprene. Boxes shall be EJB series by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton Electric Co., or equal.

G. Cast or malleable iron device boxes shall be Type FD. Cast or malleable iron boxes and fittings shall

have cadmium-zinc finish, threaded conduit connections, cast covers, and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co. or equal.

H. Cast aluminum device boxes shall be Typed FD. All cast aluminum boxes and fittings shall be

copper-free aluminum with threaded conduit connections, cast aluminum covers, and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Killark Electric Co., Crouse-Hinds Co., L.E. Mason Co., or equal.

I. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc., Raco Div., Appleton Electric

Co., or equal. J. Conduit wall seals shall be Type WSK as manufactured by the O.Z. Electrical Mfg. Co., or equal. K. Combination expansion-deflection fittings shall be Type XD as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds

Co., or equal. L. Explosion proof fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co., Appleton Electric Co.,

O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or equal. M. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O.Z. Gedney Type CSB or equal. 2.07 CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT A. Hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, etc., shall be hot-dipped galvanized iron or steel. They

shall be as manufactured by the Appleton Electric Co., Thomas and Betts Co., Unistrut Corp., or equal.

2.08 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the Thomas

and Betts Co. or equal.

160002-3

2.09 JUNCTION AND TERMINAL BOXES (REMOTE ALARM AND TELEMETERING) A. The boxes furnished shall conform to the standards of Paragraph 2.06 "Boxes and Fittings (Power

and Control)" and to the following additional requirements. B. Each box shall be furnished with 15 amp, 300 volt terminal strips. The terminal strips shall be stand-

off mounted from the box back and provide sufficient space for terminal identification. C. A minimum of 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided in all terminal boxes. D. NEMA 1 areas: Instrumentation/Alarm boxes for NEMA 1 areas shall use boxes rated NEMA 12. 2.10 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION BANDS A. Conduit identification bands shall be an embossed noncorroding, nonrusting metallic band which

encircles the conduit and is permanently secured without the use of adhesives or screws. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT - USAGE A. Aluminum Rigid Conduit (A.R.C.) shall be used exclusively throughout the plant in all above grade

installations. Aluminum conduit shall not be used below grade and shall not be encased with concrete or grout in any locations. All conduit stub-ups shall be Galvanized Rigid Steel and then a transition made to aluminum conduit for above grade installation.

B. Galvanized Rigid Steel (G.R.S.) conduit shall be used above grade where aluminum is unacceptable.

All conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be made with Galvanized Rigid Steel. C. PVC conduit shall be used for concrete encased duct bank-runs only unless detailed otherwise on the

Drawings. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (E.M.T.) shall be used only in finished office areas to supply 120/240 volt

branch circuit lighting and receptacles through ceiling or wall spaces only. (Conduits supplying circuits of this type which penetrate an exterior wall or floor slab shall be G.R.S.).

E. Sealtite conduit shall be used only at motor terminations, equipment where vibration is present, or at

equipment requiring frequent movement for adjustment. F. PVC coated GRS shall be utilized in corrosive areas at locations as noted on the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Switch, outlet, and control station boxes shall be surface or flush mounted as noted on the Drawings. B. No conduit smaller than 3/4-inch electrical trade size shall be used. Pull fittings shall be used when

conduit runs exceed the equivalent of a 300 foot straight run (each 90o bend shall be the equivalent of 50 feet of straight conduit). The number of bends shall not exceed three (3) 90o bends or a 150 foot straight run with three 90o bends.

C. No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the raceway run is complete in all details. D. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude debris and moisture while the buildings are

under construction. E. All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by means of metal clips and backplates. F. All conduits on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and

shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. Exceptions must be approved by the Engineer.

160002-4

G. Conduit termination in gasketed enclosures shall be terminated with conduit hubs. H. Conduit wall seals shall be used for all conduits penetrating walls below grade or other locations

shown on the Drawings. I. Expansion and deflection fittings shall be used where conduits cross building expansion joints. J. Conduit runs concealed in floor slabs, walls, etc., shall stub up as close as possible to the equipment

they feed. K. Explosion proof conduit seals shall be located as detailed on the Power and Instrumentation Plan

Drawings in accordance with the NEC. Explosion proof conduit seals are required in all Class I areas. L. Conduit supports shall be spaced at intervals of 8 feet or less as required to obtain rigid construction

and prevent sagging. M. Conduit terminating in pressed steel boxes shall have double locknuts and insulated bushings. N. Liquid tight, flexible metal conduit shall be used for all motor terminations and other equipment where

vibration is present except hazardous locations. 0. Flexible couplings shall be used in hazardous locations for all motor terminations and other equipment

where vibration is present. P. All locknut and bushing-type conduit terminations shall be made using locknuts on the inside and

outside of the enclosure. All locknuts shall be of the bonding type which penetrate the enclosure surface when tightened.

Q. Joints and connections shall be made up using a suitable thread lubricant to insure a tight joint

and to prevent steel conduit threads from rusting. Conduit joints and connections shall be screwed up tight using wrenches to insure good conductivity.

R. All explosion-proof sealing and drain-sealing fittings shall be sealed as follows:

1. Fitting hubs shall be dammed with fiber to prevent sealing compound from leaking out.

2. Conductors shall be separated and fiber packed between and around the conductors.

3. An approved sealing compound equal to Chico "A" shall be used to make the seal.

4. Depth of seal shall be equal to the trade size of the conduit with a minimum depth of 5/8 inch.

5. Where seals are installed above explosion-proof enclosures, seals of the self-draining type, Crouse-Hinds EZD, or equal, shall be used.

S. Aluminum conduit additional requirements are as follows:

1. An anti-galling conductive thread lubricant shall be used for all joints and connections.

2. If conduits leave a concrete encasement, they shall be coated with a bituminous paint for about 6 inches on each side of the exit point.

T. Before cable installation, a test mandrel having a diametrical clearance of not more than 1/4 inch

compared to the conduit interior diameter, shall be drawn through all conduits to be used for main distribution feeders.

U. All threaded joints in conduits above lighting fixtures or other equipment that will trap water, where

leakage into joint will migrate into equipment, shall be made watertight by applying sealing compound to threads when making up the joint.

V. Conduit connections to enclosures (junction boxes or equipment housings) shall be on the bottom or

on the side or back near the bottom to prevent entrance of water.

160002-5

W. Conduit shall not be supported from process or utility piping. X. For conduit installations, wire and cables shall be pulled into conduit in one piece between termination

or splice points, and as follows:

1. The pulling tension recommended by the cable manufacturer shall be determined and observed. Pulling eyes are preferred for large cables.

2. Petroleum-based greases shall not be used for lubricating wires and cables having

neoprene or other nonmetallic exterior jackets. All insulated conductors shall be liberally coated with suitable pulling lubricant before pulling.

Y. Drains shall be installed at the lowest points of all overhead conduits to remove water from the

conduit system. Conduits emerging from the ground and extending above ground more than 10 feet shall be drained within two feet of grade.

Conduit connections to enclosures (junction boxes or equipment housings) shall be on the bottom or on the side or back near the bottom. Drains or drain seals shall be installed in each enclosure and be as close as practical to the point of connection.

Z. A conduit identification band shall be installed on all power, instrumentation, alarm and control

conduits at each end of the run and at intermediate junction boxes, manholes, etc., as directed by the Engineer. Conduit bands shall be installed before conductors are pulled into conduits. Exact identification band location shall be coordinated with the Engineer at the time of installation to provide uniformity of placement and ease of reading. The Engineer shall be notified in the event of any conduit number omission and it will be his responsibility to furnish a properly sequenced number to the Contractor. Conduit numbers shall be exactly as shown on the Drawings.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATION SCHEME A. Conductors carrying instrumentation low level signals (4-20 ma, 1-5 V, etc.), are to be run only in "I"

series conduits. B. Conductors carrying equipment alarm signals are to be run in "A" series conduits. C. In general other conductors for power, lighting, receptacles, instrumentation 120 V power, etc., shall

be run in conduit prefixed with a letter designating the MCC or Panel from which it receives its power.

END OF SECTION

160004-1

Ascension Maintenance Building J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners Ascension Parish, Louisiana domain design architecture SECTION 160004 - WIRES AND CABLES (POWER AND CONTROL)

PART I: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install, complete ready for

operation, and field test the wire and cable system as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall comply with Section 001340. B. In addition, the submittals shall contain the following:

1. Power and control wire

2. Termination and splice materials

3. Identification system 1.03 APPLICATIONS (600 VOLT OR LESS) A. Wire for lighting, receptacles, and other single phase circuits shall be NEC Type THHN/THWN. B. Wire for three-phase circuits shall be NEC Type THW for conductors No. 8 and larger and Type THW

or Type THHN/THWN for conductors No. 10 and smaller. C. Wire for control circuits shall be NEC Type THHN/THWN No. 14 stranded. D. Cable for potentiometer circuits shall be multi-conductor No. 16 AWG twisted and shielded. E. Ground wire installed in raceways shall be NEC Type THW, green. Ground wires shall be bare where

shown on drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS A. Wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn copper. Aluminum cable will

not be acceptable. B. No conductor smaller than No. 12 AWG shall be used for power circuits. Conductors No. 8 AWG, and

larger shall be stranded. Insulation type shall be THW. C. 600 volt wire and cable shall be as manufactured by General Electric Co., General Cable Corp., Hatfield

Wire and Cable Co., Pirelli Cable Corp., or equal. D. Multi-conductor control cable shall be stranded, 600 volt, cross-linked polyethylene insulated, neoprene

jacketed, Firewall III as manufactured by the Cerro Wire & Cable Co. or equal. E. Low voltage signal (Potentiometer or RTD) cable shall be cabled, threeconductor, 600 volt, polyethylene

insulated, aluminum/polyester tape shielded with No. 18 AWG tinned copper drain wire with overall vinyl

160004-2

jacket and shall be Belden Catalog No. 8618 or equal. 2.03 SPLICES (480 VOLT POWER CONDUCTORS) A. Conductors shall be joined with a compression type connector using the die as recommended by the

splice manufacturer. Insulation integrity shall be maintained with use of either a heat shrink boot or outer covering and epoxy filling sized for the cable being spliced.

B. Splice kits shall be as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Raychem, or equal. 2.04 TERMINATION AND SPLICES (CONTROL CONDUCTORS) A. Insulated compression type connectors shall be of the expanded vinyl insulated parallel or pigtail type

as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. B. Spade connectors shall be of the type utilizing the upturned spade end design to prevent connector

pullout. Connectors shall be as manufactured by Ideal Industries, 3M Co., Panduit Corp., or equal. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Wire markers used shall be of the heat shrinkable tube design with custom typed identification

numbers, exactly as detailed on the Drawings. The tube and typed marking shall be of a permanent, non-smearing, solvent resistant design similar to Raychem TMS, Ideal Industries, 3M Co., or equal.

2.06 FIRE-PROOFING TAPE A. Fire-proofing tape shall be Scotch No. 77 fire and electric arc proofing tape. To hold fire-proofing tape

in place, band with two (2) overlapping laps of Scotch No. 69 glass cloth electrical tape. 2.07 WALL AND FLOOR SLAB OPENING SEALS A. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "Flame-Safe" as manufactured by Thomas & Betts

Co. or equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All conductors shall be carefully handled to avoid kinks or damage to insulation. B. Lubrications shall be used to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be U.L. approved for use with the

insulation specified. C. Power conductors #2 AWG and larger shall be run in a conduit separate from the control conductors. D. All wires, cables, and each conductor of multiconductor cables (except lighting and receptacle wiring)

shall be uniquely identified at each end with wire and cable markers. E. Shielded instrumentation wire shall be installed from terminal to terminal with no splicing at any

intermediate point. F. Shielded instrumentation wire shall be installed in conduit and pull boxes that contain only shielded

instrumentation wire. G. Shielding on instrumentation wire shall be grounded at the transmitter end only. H. Openings in slabs and walls through which wires and cables pass shall be sealed. I. Where cables pass through walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be sealed against the

passage of flame, smoke, and gas.

160004-3

3.02 TESTS Wire and Cable Tests with Documentation shall be made as follows: A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and below shall be tested as follows:

1. All cables and leads shall be tested for continuity and power leads for service above 125 volts shall be given a megger test.

2. Wire and cable rated 600 volts and below shall have an insulation resistance test before

connection to equipment. The test shall be made using a 500 volt megger. Measure phase to phase and phase to ground. The minimum insulation resistance value shall be 25 megohms.

3. Lighting branch circuits and 120 volt services shall be tested during construction for

continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to see that circuits perform all functions for which they are designed.

4. All control wires shall be checked for continuity and identification by means of a D.C. test

device using a bell and buzzer to "ring-out" the wires. B. Wire and cable rated from 1000 volts to 5000 volts shall have an insulation resistance test made

before connecting to equipment. Minimum insulation resistance shall be the megohms per 1000 feet valves specified in the applicable Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) standard for the type of wire or cable being tested.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Wire markers shall be applied to all control, alarm, and instrumentation wires or cables installed

under this project. B. Wire numbers shall be exactly as noted on the Drawings. The Engineer shall be notified in the

event of any wire number omission and it will be his responsibility to furnish a properly sequenced number to the Contractor.

C. Wire markers shall be installed before wires are connected to their designated terminals. D. All power wiring not having individualized identification numbers shall be color coded with electrical

tape or colored wire jacket in accordance with the following scheme.

120 volt supply Phase leads single or high speed: Yellow Low speed: Orange 480 volt supply Ll: Black L2: Red L3: Blue Neutral: White Equipment grounding conductor: Green Graphic panel and alarm: Blue Control: Red

E. Phase taping shall be provided on all MCC feeders, branch circuits, etc., using the above colors

and the following scheme.

Phase A = One band Phase B = Two bands Phase C = Three bands

160004-4

3.04 TERMINATION AND SPLICES A. 480 volt power conductors: Terminations use pressure connectors (split bolt type at motor terminal

boxes). Splices (where allowed) use compression type connector and water-proof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling. Splices allowed at terminal boxes only.

B. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly with a maximum of

two conductors. Termination on screw type terminals shall be made with a maximum of two conductors. Splices (where allowed) shall be made with insulated compression type connectors.

C. Instrumentation Signal Conductors: (Including alarm, low and high level signals.) Terminations same as

for control conductors. Splices allowed at terminal boxes only. D. 120 volt lighting and receptacles: Termination as device requires. Splices shall be made with wire nuts. E. In general, no splices will be allowed in manholes, handholes, or below grade located boxes. In special

circumstances where splices are required, the Engineer may allow their use. However, the Contractor shall not proceed until written approval has been received from the Engineer.

F. Splices shall not be made in push button control stations, control devices (i.e., pressure switches, flow

switches, etc.), conduit bodies, etc.

END OF SECTION

160007-1

Ascension Maintenance Building J & J Consulting Engineers & Planners Ascension Parish, Louisiana domain design architecture SECTION 160007 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install complete ready for operation, and field test the miscellaneous electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. The following equipment is included under this Section:

1. Panelboards

2. Disconnect Switches

3. Pushbutton Control Stations

4. Dry Transformers

5. Wiring Devices

6. Junction Boxes and Wireways

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with Section 001340. B. In addition the submittals shall contain applicable information on all products specified in this

Section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS

A. Boxes shall be made from galvanized code gauge steel having multiple knockouts unless otherwise noted. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 4 inches on all sides.

B. Bus bars for the mains shall be of copper. Full size neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar

taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be copper.

C. Neutral bussing shall have suitable lugs for outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.

D. Hinged doors covering all circuit breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims.

E. Doors shall have semi-flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 48 inches in

height shall have a vault handle and 3 point catch, complete with lock, arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed. Two keys shall be supplied for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directory frame and card having a transparent

160007-2

cover shall be furnished on each door.

F. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard shall be properly cleaned and finished with ANSI Z55.1, No. 61 light gray paint over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating.

G. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip settings as

shown on the Drawings.

H. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-in type.

I. Circuit breakers used in 120/208 volt distribution panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than 10,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical.

J. Circuit breakers noted on the Drawings for emergency and/or night-light circuits shall be

suitable for switching duty.

K. GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter) shall be provided for circuits where indicated on the Drawings. GFCI units shall be 1 pole, 120 volt, molded case, bolt-on breakers, incorporating a solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. The unit shall be U.L. listed Class A, Ground I device (5 milliamp sensitivity, 25 millisecond trip time), and an interrupting capacity of 1,000 amperes RMS.

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 volt, 3 pole with full cover interlock.

B. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 12 for indoor applications and NEMA 3R for outdoor

applications except as shown on the Drawings or indicated otherwise herein.

C. NEMA Type 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel.

D. NEMA Type 7 enclosures shall be cast iron.

E. Switches shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, or equal. 2.03 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL STATIONS

A. Control stations shall be heavy-duty type, with full size operators and function identification nameplate (i.e., on-off).

B. NEMA Type 4X enclosures shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester material.

C. NEMA Type 7 enclosures shall be cast iron.

D. Control stations shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, or equal.

2.04 DRY TRANSFORMERS

A. Transformers shall be dry type, two-winding, 480-120/208 volt, 3 phase with KVA ratings as shown on the Drawings.

B. Four full capacity taps shall be furnished, two 2-1/2 percent above and two 2-1/2 percent

below rated primary voltage.

C. Transformers shall be constructed with 150 degrees C winding rise/220 degrees C insulation system, suitable for use in a 40 degree C ambient.

D. Transformers shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Jefferson, General Electric,

160007-3

Square D, or equal. 2.05 WIRING DEVICES

A. Switches

1. General purpose switches shall be AC quiet type General Electric 20 Amp, 120/277 volt #GE 5951 (single pole) or #GE 5953 (three-way), Hubbell, or equal.

2. Weatherproof switches shall be standard duty NEMA 4X control stations

Westinghouse #5665D36, General Electric, or equal.

B. Receptacles

1. Duplex receptacles shall be NEMA 5-15R and single receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20R.

2. General use receptacles shall be General Electric 15 Amp, 120 volt GE 4065

(duplex), 20 Amp, 120 volt GE 4102 (single) and 20 Amp, 250 volt GE 4182 (single), Hubbell, or equal.

3. Receptacles noted on the Drawings as being Ground Fault Interrupter type (GFI)

shall be Hubbell GF-5262 series or equal. Exterior receptacles shall have weatherproof cover plate.

C. Device Plates

1. Devices installed in finished rooms shall be provided with Type 302 stainless steel face plates.

2. Devices in areas exposed to weather or designated to be weatherproof on the plans

shall be provided with hinged gasketed covers. All receptacles located outdoors shall have covers. Receptacles located in buildings, except MCC & Switchgear Rooms, shall be weatherproof with hinged gasketed covers.

2.6 WIREWAYS

A. Wireways shall be steel "Square-Duct" as manufactured by the Square D Co., or equal. 2.7 ELECTRICAL DEVICES FURNISHED WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified or shown in other sections of the specifications, all electrical power, control or instrumentation devices furnished as a "package" with mechanical equipment shall conform to the latest issue and addenda to the Joint Industry Council Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment (EMP-1-67) or as modified herein.

B. Panels housing electrical equipment shall be either NEMA 4X (non-metallic corrosion

resistant or 316 stainless steel) or NEMA 12 (dust tight) suitable for floor or wall mounting as detailed on the Electrical Power and Instrumentation Plan Sheets. Where specified to the NEMA 4X refer to Section 16 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment for construction details.

C. Separate power, control and instrumentation terminal strips shall be provided for all external panel connections. All terminal points shall have identification numbers approved by the ENGINEER.

D. All panels housing electrical equipment shall be designed for front access only.

E. Conductors extending beyond a panel to other auxiliary equipment which is prewired on a

skid type or a package base shall be protected by aluminum rigid conduit. Where terminating at a motor or other similar device requiring frequent movement or which

160007-4

produces excessive vibration liquid tight type flexible conduit shall be used. Liquid tight conduit will be limited to three (3) feet maximum length at any termination.

F. Gasketed type conduit hibs will be used for all conduit penetrations of the panel.

G. A main panel power disconnect device shall be an integral part of the panel and shall be one

of the following types:

1. A horsepower rated heavy duty safety switch or non-automatic circuit breaker for 480 volt, one phase or three phase panels.

2. A heavy duty safety switch, non-sutomatic circuit breaker or fractional horsepower manual motor starter switch without overloads for 120 volt, one phase panels.

H. Unless otherwise noted all panels supplied with a 480 volt power feeder shall be provided

with an integrally mounted dual winding 120 volt control power transformer with primary and secondary fusing. Control power transformers shall have the neutral grounded.

I. Starters incorporated into panels shall have thermal type overload relays in each

underground conductor. Overloads shall be adjustable for either manual or automatic reset. Starters shall be NEMA sized in accordance with the HP shown on the drawings.

J. All wiring shall be copper conductors with NEC insulation designation of MTW or THWN K. All devised shall be of a heavy duty industrial type quality. Devices mounted in panel interiors

shall be suitable for use in non-ventilated panels subjected to a 40 degrees C ambient without system deterioration.

L. Schematic (elementary) diagrams, wiring (interconnection) diagrams, and equipment lists

shall be furnished for all panels. For panels containing a complex control scheme, a written operational theory shall be crossreferenced to the schematic diagram. The wiring diagram in its "as-built" form shall be fastened to the panel door. The equipment list shall identify the manufacturer, manufacturer's part of model number and a cross reference as to its location in the panel.

M. Contacts for external alarms or equipment interlocking shall be of the isolated contact type

and provided as required per individual equipment specifications, Process and Instrumentation Drawings, or the Electrical Control Schematics. Contacts shall be rated at 10 amps continuous pilot duty.

N. Input or output instrumentation level signals shall in general be 4-20 ma and provided as

required per individual equipment specifications and the process and Instrumentation Drawings.

0. Auxiliary devices (pressure switches, flow switches, etc.) located remotely from panels but

furnished under this section shall have enclosures in conformance with the area classificationnoted on the Electrical Drawings.

END OF SECTION

160008-1


SECTION 160008 - LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install complete ready for

operation and field test the interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the Drawings and/or Specifications herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall comply with Section 001340. B. In addition, the submittals shall contain the following:

1. Fixtures

2. Ballasts

3. Poles PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as required by the schedules on the Drawings, shall be complete

with required lamps, ballasts, guards, enclosures, and lenses, and be completely wired. Unless otherwise indicated, fluorescent lamps shall be standard warm white, mercury vapor shall be deluxe white, and sodium vapor lamps shall be high pressure type. Where fixtures are to be installed recessed, verify the type of ceiling or wall construction and furnish the appropriate frames, mounting devices, and hardware.

B. When mounting ceiling lights in vicinity of monorails make sure there is adequate clearance for all

crane movements. This may entail mounting lights after crane is installed. Contractor is responsible for coordinating final location of light fixtures in all buildings with monorails or cranes. Final location shall be approved by the Engineer.

2.02 LAMPS AND BALLASTS A. Lamps installed in each fixture shall be of the type specifically recommended by the manufacturer of

the fixture for use in the fixture, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Fluorescent lamps shall be T8, cool white, rapid start, energy saver, 4100°K color temperature, 75

CRI, 2850 initial lumens, unless specified otherwise. C. Electronic ballasts shall be as described below. D. Metal halide lamps shall be universal burn, 3,000K color temperature, 70 CRI, diffuse-coated, unless

specified otherwise. Lamps shall be pulse start type with open rated mogul base socket, and shall include protective shield with UV protection.

E. HID ballasts shall be high power factor type. 2.03 POLES AND POLE-MOUNTED FIXTURES

160008-2

A. Unless otherwise specified, all poles shall be United Lighting Standards Square Painted Bronze, or engineer approved equal. Poles shall be 25 foot suited for area wind rating, or engineer approved equal. Suited for area wind rating with all required mounting brackets and other hardware. The poles shall, as close as possible, match existing light poles at plant.

2.08 CONCRETE POLE BASE A. Concrete bases for exterior lighting shall be detailed on the Electrical Detail Drawing. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, pendant fixtures shall be suspended with rigid stems

such as conduit. The use of threaded rods is prohibited. Fixtures over two feet long shall be supported with a minimum of two stems. Each stem shall be provided with a ball and socket type self-aligning hanger as manufactured by Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or equal. Pendant fixtures shall be grounded by means of separate conductor connected to a grounding bushing or lug in the outlet box.

B. Conduit run in areas with hung ceilings shall be installed in the space above the hung ceiling as close

to the structure as possible. Conduits shall be supported from the structure. C. Contractor shall refer to Drawings for Luminaire Voltage required. D. Refer to lighting fixture schedules on Drawings for actual fixtures to be furnished in different areas of

the Plant. 3.02 CLEANING UP A. All fixtures shall be left in a clean condition, free of dirt and defects, before acceptance by the

Engineer.

END OF SECTION


Section 160009- INDUSTRIAL GASEOUS GENERATOR SET

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Standby Engine Generator

The installation of a natural gas powered standby electric power system shall include a Caterpillar or Olympian G130LG 130kW Series electric generator set or equal. The rating of the standby generator shall be 130kW, 163kVA at 120/208V, 0.8 power factor, 3 phase, 60 Hertz. The system shall be a package of new and current equipment consisting of:

a) An engine driven electric generating set to provide standby power.

b) An engine start/stop solid state system mounted on the generating set.

c) An automatic load transfer control to provide automatic starting and stopping of the engine and switching the load.

d) Mounted accessories as specified.

1.02 Responsibility

Each generator set shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer, who has been regularly engaged in the production of the engine alternator sets and associated controls for a minimum of ten years so there is one source of supply and responsibility.

1.03 Manufacturer Qualification

Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing and design of engine generator sets for not less than ten years. The firm shall have produced engine generator sets that have been in continuous satisfactory operation for not less than three years in similar service.

Manufacturer must have a local service firm that has been factory authorized in the local area of responsibility.

1.04 Manufacturer Requirements

Single manufacturer responsibility for the complete engine generator set including the manufacture of the engine and/or the alternator, design and manufacture of controls, building of set, factory test, factory warranty and shipping.

Coordinating between manufacturer, distributor, and contractor is essential. The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard series offered (not a one-of-a-kind fabrication). The manufacturer shall provide schematic and wiring diagrams for the complete standby power system.

1.05 Supplier Qualification

Firm engaged in the provision and service of engine generator sets. Firm maintains a factory authorized service organization with factory trained service technicians and an appropriately sized fleet of dedicated service trucks equipped to service this equipment. Firm must be domiciled within a 50 mile radius of the project, maintain stock of standard spare parts and offer 24 hour service availability, 7 days a week. Firm shall be able to demonstrate their long-term ability to support a project of this scope. Major engine, controls, and alternator parts shall regularly be stocked locally. Additional parts shall be available within 48 hours per the manufacturers’ stated program. Supplier shall have a documented record of supplying and supporting complete operating emergency and standby power systems including gensets, transfer switches, paralleling switchgear, and uninterruptible power supplies.

1.06 Acceptable Manufacturers

Caterpillar and Olympian and equal

Part 2 - Products

2.01 Engine

The engine shall be natural gas fueled 4 cycle, water cooled with mounted radiator, fan, water pump and closed recovery system. The radiator shall be capable of providing sufficient cooling capabilities for operation in 110° (122°) Fahrenheit ambient temperature with a minimum 10° temperature rise factored in. It shall have 10 cylinders with a minimum cubic inch displacement of 6.8(414.96) and shall have a minimum BHP of 189 at 3000 RPM.

The engine shall have hard faced exhaust valves with rotators. Lubrication shall be full pressure as supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall be equipped with a dry type air cleaner and oil filter with replaceable elements.

Engine speed shall be controlled by an electronic governor to maintain alternator frequency within 1 Hertz from no load to rated alternator output. The engine shall have a 12 or 24 volt battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote starting shall be by a 12 or 24 volt solenoid shift electric starter.

The generator set shall contain a complete solid state start/stop control which starts the engine on closing contact and stops the engine on opening contact. Cycle cranking shall be provided to open the start circuit after eight attempts to start the engine have failed.

2.02 Alternator

The alternator shall be four pole revolving field design with a temperature compensated Volts/Hertz voltage regulator and brushless excitation system. The stator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel housing and the rotor shall be drive through a semi-flexible flange to ensure alignment. The

insulation system shall be class F as defined by the NEMA MG-1.65 definition. The three phase alternator shall be 10 or 12 lead reconnectable.

Frequency regulation shall not exceed 1 Hertz from no load to rated load. Voltage regulation shall be with +/- 1% of rated voltage at 60 Hertz from no load to full load. The instantaneous voltage dip shall be less than 12.5% of rated voltage when full 3 phase load and rated power factor is applied to the alternator. Recovery to stable operation shall occur within 2 seconds. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of +/- 5% voltage adjustment from rated value. Temperature rise shall be within the NEMA MG-22.40 definition.

2.03 Instrument Panel

The alternator instrument panel shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, wired, tested and shock mounted on the generating set by the manufacturer of the alternator. It shall contain panel lighting, automatic reset circuit breaker, oil pressure gauge, coolant temperature gauge, DC battery charge ammeter, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting rheostat, AC voltmeter, AC ammeter and phase selector switch. In addition, it will have the following shutdowns and indicator lights which will latch in the “on” position should a fault occur until manually reset. A test and reset switch shall also be provided to test the operation of the lights.

a) Low oil pressure

b) High coolant temperature

c) Low coolant level

d) Overcrank

e) Overspeed

f) RPM sensor loss

g) Low fuel

h) Switch not in auto.

The control panel shall also have the following pre-alarm lights:

a) Low oil pressure

b) High coolant temperature

c) Low coolant temperature

d) High battery voltage

e) Low battery voltage

2.04 Miscellaneous Equipment

The standby power system shall also have the following items:

a) Critical type muffler

b) Flex exhaust connection

c) Starting batteries

d) Battery rack

e) Battery cables

f) Flexible fuel lines

g) 425 amp main line circuit breaker

h) Block heater

2.06 Weather Housing

Where plans indicate the standby generator will be located outdoors, the generating set shall be enclosed in a weather protective zinc coated sheet metal housing with hinged, locking doors. Finish shall be baked enamel.

Part 3 - Execution

3.01 Miscellaneous

Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all fuel connections between main fuel supply, engine, etc., all in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Contractor shall supply owner’s operating personnel with detailed operation and maintenance manuals including complete parts list. Manuals shall include engine manufacturer’s maintenance recommendations as well as alternator operating instructions.

3.02 Warranty

Standby electric generating components, including engine, generator, instrument panel, and radiator shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and factory workmanship for a period of two years. Supplier shall be the sole executor of all warranty repairs. Suppliers unable to perform warranty repairs and must subcontract them to another manufacturer’s representative do not meet this specification. Extended service coverages up to 10 years shall be available. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service.

3.03 Submittals

Provide 3 sets of submittals for engineering review and approval prior to production release. The submittals shall include engine data, installation drawings, all wiring and interconnect diagrams, the manufacturers published warranty, spec sheets and all other pertinent information relative to this unit.

3.04 Check Out And Start Up

Supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to check out the complete installation and perform the initial start-up of the system. They shall meet with the owners operating personnel to review the operation of the complete standby system. Once the system is operational, the load will be transferred to the standby generator system to demonstrate the ability of the standby generator to assume the emergency load.

Part 4-Automatic Transfer Switch

4.01 General

The standard control components shall be compatible with the requirements of the standby set and provide the following features:

a) UL 1008 listed.

b) 100% equipment rated. Can be used at rated current continuous duty with deration.

c) NEMA 12 enclosure, NEMA 3R if plans indicate transfer switch will be located outdoors.

d) Contacts shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.

e) There shall be front access to all solid state control boards.

f) Control boards are to be protected in a separate lockable enclosure located in the door of the automatic transfer switch. It shall have a transparent cover to allow visual reading of voltage settings and time delays.

g) The automatic transfer switch shall contain a neutral block suitable for the connection of all neutral conductors.

h) The transfer time shall be 160 milliseconds or less.

i) The normal source voltage shall be monitored across all phases of normal power with drop out and pick up points adjustable from 70% to 90%.

j) The switch must contain a manual operating handle.

k) Utility interrupt delay shall be adjustable from 5 seconds to 3 minutes.

l) The automatic transfer switch shall have an engine warm up bypass selector switch.

m) Standby voltage required before transfer shall be adjustable from 70% to 90% of nominal, standby frequency required before transfer shall be adjustable from 80% to 90% of nominal.

n) Return to utility delay shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 minutes.

o) Engine cool down timer shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 minutes.

p) Minimum run timer shall be adjustable from 5 to 30 minutes.

q) The automatic transfer switch shall include a 7 day exerciser.

r) The automatic transfer switch shall have status lights to provide a visual read out of operation sequence including: utility on, engine warm up, engine warm up bypass, standby voltage ready, standby frequency ready, standby operating, return to utility, engine cool down, engine minimum run, switch in fast test mode.

s) Front mounted controls shall include a selector switch for normal test and fast test mode. It will also have utility and emergency lights to indicate switch position and a lamp to indicate standby operating

t) The automatic transfer switch shall provide one set of auxiliary contacts.

u) The 100 to 1200 amp 600 volt switches shall incorporate built-in-arc chutes to suppress and extinguish the arc.